JP6648083B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a game machine of this type, there is one generally known as a variable display (also referred to as a variable display). As such a gaming machine, there has been a gaming machine that performs a prefetch determination on a variable display that has not been started yet and performs a prefetch effect as a specific effect according to the determination result. In addition, there has been a technique in which a symbol is temporarily stopped during one change and then re-changed, and a pseudo-sequence effect using a so-called pseudo-sequence change that makes it appear as if a plurality of changes have been performed.

  When executing these pre-reading effects or pseudo-sequence effects, there are some which change the background (for example, see Patent Document 1). By performing a look-ahead effect or a pseudo-sequence effect, an expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is increased. Further, when performing a pre-reading effect or a pseudo consecutive effect, the sense of expectation is further increased by changing the background image.

JP 2013-146506 A

  However, in the game machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 described above, in which the background image is changed together with the execution of the look-ahead effect or the pseudo-sequence effect, it is sufficient that the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is high. There was something I couldn't emphasize.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of emphasizing a situation in which the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is high.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like)
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state or the like) advantageous to a player,
A specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 101 or the like) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone notice effect or the like) indicating a shift to the advantageous state over a plurality of changes;
Predetermined effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 101, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of predetermined effects different from each other (for example, a BGM effect such as a normal BGM effect, a zone BGM effect, a super BGM effect, etc.);
A notification effect (for example, a CPU 101 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing an information effect (for example, a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
Special display means for performing a special display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing a special display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game;
Special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect of performing either a successful effect or a failed effect after performing a common introduction effect ,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period elapses after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, the display of the icon as the special display is changed). The special display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, an icon is displayed (the special display changes, etc.),
The special notification executing means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, it is notified that an icon as the special display is displayed). Abnormal notification is also possible within a predetermined period after
The predetermined effect execution means,
In response to the execution of the specific effect, execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started (for example, a zone BGM effect is executed when a zone announcement effect is executed), and the specific effect is executed. The predetermined effect (for example, zone) corresponding to the specific effect according to the end of the notification effect executed after the effect (for example, the end of the super-reach effect executed after the zone notice effect is executed). A first pattern for ending the execution of the zone BGM effect corresponding to the notice effect (for example, ending the zone BGM effect in response to the end of the super reach effect executed after the zone notice effect is executed);
In response to the execution of the specific effect, execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started, and during the execution of the notification effect executed after the specific effect (for example, when a zone announcement effect is executed) In response to execution of a special effect (for example, a character effect in which the effecting character 60 performs a tilting operation) indicating that the state is shifted to the advantageous state during a super-reach effect performed after the execution, for example. changing the type of the predetermined effect Te (eg, switches the BGM effect output from the speaker 27 from the zone BGM effect super BGM effect) Ri executable der and the second pattern, and
The special effect execution means does not execute the special effect in which the failed effect is performed in a period from when the display mode of the special display is notified to the change of the display mode of the special display. The special effect in which the successful effect is performed is executable .

  According to such a configuration, it can be emphasized that the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher, and interest can be improved. In addition, the game situation can be grasped even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the special display is notified to be changed, and a decrease in the game interest can be prevented.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above,
The specific effect can be executed in accordance with the passage of the game medium to a prize device (for example, the first start winning opening 13 or the like) through which the game medium can pass (for example, a zone notice at the time of winning the first start winning opening 13). Performing an effect, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a situation in which the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is high according to the passage of the game medium to the winning device.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
Determining means (for example, a microcomputer 560 for game control, etc.) for determining whether or not to control to the advantageous state when starting the fluctuation;
Determining means (for example, effect control CPU 101 or the like) for determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the change of the determination target (for example, target change or the like) by the determining means;
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, executing a first zone announcement effect as a zone announcement effect).
The specific effect includes an introductory effect (for example, a zone announcement effect while the shutter is closed) and a main effect (for example, a zone announcement effect after opening the shutter).
The specific effect execution unit is capable of executing the introduction effect in a change (for example, a change before the start of the target change) of the determination target of the determination unit before the start of the change (for example, until the target change is started). A zone announcement effect is performed while the shutter is closed), and the main effect can be executed while the determination target of the determination means fluctuates (for example, a zone announcement effect is produced after the shutter is opened during a target change). There may be.

  According to such a configuration, an expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state can be maintained for a long time, and interest can be improved.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect with a variation of 1 (for example, a second zone announcement effect in which a zone announcement effect with the shutter closed and a zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened with the target variation can be executed). And
The introduction effect and the main effect can be continuously executed with a change of 1 (for example, in the second zone notice effect, the zone notice effect while the shutter is closed and the zone notice effect after the shutter is opened are continuously changed with a change of 1). Execution, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the effects can be diversified, and the interest can be improved.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
The specific effect execution means can execute an effect of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a shutter image or the like) having a high display priority (for example, a small Z value assigned to a plurality of display layers) as the introduction effect ( For example, a zone announcement effect for displaying a shutter image, etc.)
Regardless of whether or not the specific effect is executed in a change before the start of the change of the determination target of the determination means (for example, a change before the start of the target change)
An execution lottery corresponding to an effect with a low display priority (for example, an effect executed in a layer having a large Z value assigned to a plurality of display layers) is possible (for example, a zone announcement effect in which a shutter image is displayed is executed). Irrespective of whether or not it is performed, a reach effect or the like is executed).

  According to such a configuration, the displayed predetermined image can be surely visually recognized by the player.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The specific effect execution means can perform a predetermined display (for example, a special background image or the like) corresponding to the specific effect during execution of the specific effect,
Even when the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect ends during the notification effect (for example, when the zone BGM effect ends during the super reach effect), the predetermined display is continuously displayed during the notification effect. May be displayed (for example, a special background image is displayed in a super-reach effect after the zone notice effect).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the specific effect has been executed.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
A movable body effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 101 or the like) capable of executing a movable object effect as the special effect (for example, a character effect in which the effect character 60 performs a tilting operation);
The movable body effect execution means is capable of performing an effect using the same movable body as the specific effect before execution of the specific effect (for example, a character effect effect is performed during a normal reach effect). In the example, the type of the predetermined effect may not be switched (for example, even if the character effect is executed during the normal reach, the BGM effect may not be switched from the normal BGM effect or the zone BGM effect).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the situation in which the movable body effect is executed is executed, so that it is possible to suppress the excessively high expectation while increasing the execution frequency of the movable object effect. Can be.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Look-ahead determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for performing a look-ahead determination on a variation display that has not yet been started (for example, a variation display stored as hold storage information);
Predetermined notification means for executing a predetermined notification (for example, a pre-reading notification by displaying a pre-reading notification image 94) in response to the execution of the pre-reading effect by the pre-reading effect means,
The specific effect execution means, as the specific effect, a plurality of types of specific effects according to the determination result of the look-ahead determination by the look-ahead determination means (for example, a chance eye announcement effect, a background change announcement effect, and a hold change announcement effect, etc.) Pre-reading effect, etc.) can be executed before the start of the fluctuation display of the pre-read determination target (for example, the fluctuation display of the target fluctuation),
The predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification in a common mode (for example, a common image display mode such as the pre-reading notification image 94) regardless of the type of the specific effect.

  According to such a configuration, by executing the common notification effect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the execution of the prefetch effect.

  Embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the following (9) to (17). 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a launching device, and a game medium wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, and execution conditions (start conditions) are reduced. When established, a so-called variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as “display symbols”) is variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined game value is given is determined based on the display result. There is a pachinko gaming machine that has increased the entertainment interest. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the game machine enters an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. For example, a pachinko gaming machine that has entered the jackpot gaming state has a special winning combination or a special electric auditorium called an attacker in an open state, and the gaming state is extremely easy to win a game ball to give a predetermined game value to a player. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various types of effects are performed to make the player expect the display result to be in a specific display mode. As such a game machine, after displaying a plurality of images as a specific display as shown in JP-A-2015-160056, the display mode of the specific display is changed by combining the plurality of images. There is a gaming machine that performs an effect of notifying and displaying the specific display. However, in such a gaming machine, if information about the game is not notified for a predetermined period after the player recognizes that the display mode of the specific display is changed, the gaming state cannot be grasped, and the gaming interest decreases. There is a risk that it will. In view of this, there has been a demand for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing a decrease in gaming interest.

(9) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
Special display means for performing a special display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing a special display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period elapses after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, the display of the icon as the special display is changed). The special display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, an icon is displayed (the special display changes, etc.),
The special notification executing means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed). Abnormal notification is also possible within a predetermined period after
It is characterized by the following.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming situation can be grasped even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the special display is notified, and a decrease in gaming interest can be prevented.

(10) In the gaming machine of the above (9),
Special effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing a pseudo continuous fanning effect) capable of executing a special effect of performing either a successful effect or a failed effect after performing a common introduction effect,
The special display means is capable of changing a display mode of the special display when an effect result of the predetermined effect is a specific result (for example, displaying an icon as a special display when the effect result of the predetermined effect indicates success). Such),
The special effect execution means is configured to execute the successful effect at a high rate during a period from when the effect result of the predetermined effect is indicated as the specific result to when the display mode of the special display changes. Execute a special effect (for example, determine the timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

(11) In the gaming machine of (9) or (10),
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display step by step by displaying different kinds of special images (for example, when a plurality of special display effects are performed, the special display is displayed step by step). More icons),
In accordance with the combination of the displayed special images, one of a plurality of effects having different ratios controlled to the advantageous state is executed at a different ratio (for example, an icon to be displayed (a combination of icons) is variably displayed. Depending on the result)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which special image is displayed.

(12) In the gaming machine according to (10) or (11),
There are a plurality of start timings of the predetermined effect, and the ratio of the effect result of the predetermined effect to the specific result differs depending on which timing the start timing of the predetermined effect is (for example, according to the execution timing of the predetermined effect). The result of the given effect is different, indicating a success rate)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the player's attention to the start timing of the predetermined effect can be attracted.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (12),
A corresponding display means for performing a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for performing an active display);
A corresponding display changing unit (such as an effect control CPU 90120 for performing an active display change effect) for changing a display mode of the corresponding display;
Depending on the combination of the display mode of the corresponding display and the display mode of the special display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs (for example, the display mode of the active display and the display mode of the special display (the number and combination of icons)). Varies the ratio of variable display results to "big hits" depending on the combination of
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be improved.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (13),
A specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect notifying the advantage (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a reach effect of super reach);
Special change effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for executing a special change effect) capable of executing a special change effect for changing the display mode of the special display when the specific effect is executed. In addition,
The special change effect execution means is capable of executing the special change effect in a mode prior to the specific effect (for example, performing a special change effect by interrupting a super reach effect).
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the mode of the special display can be changed according to a mode that takes precedence over the specific effect. Therefore, even when the specific effect is executed, the change in the mode of the special display can be noticed.

(15) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (14),
A plurality of selection candidates are presented, and selection means (for example, an effect control CPU 90120 for executing a race effect as a predetermined effect) capable of selecting any of the presented plurality of selection candidates is provided.
The plurality of selection candidates include a first selection candidate and a second selection candidate having a higher degree of advantage than the first candidate when selected (for example, the degree of success expectation as a result of the production of the predetermined production is compared. And a selection candidate belonging to a first group that is relatively low, and a selection candidate belonging to a second group that has a relatively high degree of expectation of success as an effect of the predetermined effect.
The selecting means may include, when the first selection candidates are not included in the plurality of presented selection candidates, any of the plurality of selection candidates at a higher rate than when the first plurality of selection candidates is included in the presented plurality of selection candidates. Not selected (for example, the second suspension rate is set higher than the first suspension rate)
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (15),
The special notification executing means is capable of executing an abnormality display as the special notification based on the abnormality determination being performed, and the special notification is performed during a predetermined period after the display mode of the special display is notified to be changed. The abnormality display can be started even when the abnormality determination is performed (for example, the abnormality notification can be performed within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed).
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, an error display can be suitably performed.

(17) In the gaming machine according to any one of (9) to (16),
The special notification execution means can update the display of the number of obtained balls as the special notification even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the special display is changed (for example, when the icon as the special display is changed). It is possible to update the number of acquired balls even within a predetermined period after being notified that the item is displayed),
You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably perform the notification of the acquired payout number.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a figure showing a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit composition in a main board (game control board). FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern table used for determining a fluctuation pattern in a table form. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a look-ahead effect type table showing the relationship between the type of the look-ahead effect, the contents of the look-ahead effect, and the start time of the look-ahead effect. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device for explaining a prefetch effect. It is a display screen figure of the effect display device which shows the pre-reading notification end effect for terminating the pre-reading notification when pre-reading notification is executed. It is a display screen figure of an effect display device for explaining a zone notice effect. It shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the various determination tables for determining whether to perform a prefetch effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the look-ahead effect execution start fluctuation selection table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data holding area for effect control. It is explanatory drawing which shows the reception command buffer at the time of start winning + the effect buffer. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the reception command buffer data specified at the time of start winning. It is a timing chart which shows the relation between pre-reading production and pre-reading notice. It is a flowchart which shows a prefetch effect process. It is a flowchart which shows a zone announcement effect process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation start process. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing A. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process B. It is a table | surface which shows the effect pattern after shutter release. It is a time chart which shows the production mode of the 1st zone notice production. It is a figure showing the flow of the 1st zone notice production. It is a time chart which shows the production mode of the 2nd zone notice production. It is a figure showing the flow of the 2nd zone notice production. It is a time chart which shows the production mode of the 3rd zone notice production. It is a figure showing the flow of the 3rd zone notice production. It is a time chart which shows the production mode when the 1st zone notice production is performed in production pattern 3. It is a time chart which shows the production mode when the 1st zone notice production is performed by production pattern 1. It is a time chart which shows the production mode when the 1st zone notice production is performed in production pattern 2. It is a time chart which shows the production mode when a zone announcement production is performed in the production pattern 6. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect effect setting process. It is a display screen figure of the effect display performed according to the effect effect setting processing in the effect display device. It is a figure showing an example of a display in an effect display device when an adjustment result image is displayed during a predetermined effect. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a special figure reservation storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a special figure display result decision table. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a big hit type decision table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a figure showing the example of composition of a fluctuation pattern decision table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special display effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the special display effect execution determination table and the special display effect execution mode determination table. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table. It is a timing chart which shows the details of a special display effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of a special display effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect execution setting process. It is a figure showing an example of composition of a notice effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the execution timing determination table referred in order to determine the execution timing of a notice effect. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of a notice effect when a special display effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation in the case where a special display production and a failure production are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in case a special display effect and a successful effect are performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in case a special display effect and a notice effect are performed. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a rendering operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation when an effect setting is performed by a player at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 69. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in the case of performing a race effect as predetermined suggestion effect. When a special display effect is performed and the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first-stage display mode, and an active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first mode according to the change in the meter display is executed. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It shows an example of an effect operation in a case where the super reach effect is executed alone. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement when a special display effect and an active display change effect are performed when a super reach effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement when a special display effect and an active display change effect are performed when a super reach effect is performed. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when an auto button function is set to be enabled or disabled. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by a long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an auto button function.

  Hereinafter, an example of an embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, or a gaming machine that performs a variable display. Any gaming machine may be used.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit type table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is played by hitting a game ball as a game medium into the game area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame that is openably and closably mounted inside the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape and provided in a game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is installed to be freely openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components (games to be described later) attached thereto. (Excluding the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. A lower portion of the hitting ball supply tray 3 is provided with a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a hitting ball, and the like. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which a hit game ball can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position (for example, a central portion of the lower tray) on the near side on the upper surface of the lower tray main body. A stick controller 122 that can be operated to hold and tilt in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 122 is provided with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger or the like) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with the operation hand (for example, the left hand or the like) and performs a predetermined operation. A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that allows an instruction operation is provided.

  A member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 has a player instructing a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the near side on the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship at the center of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be set to the position on the upper plate and the lower plate that is shifted to the left or right while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical position but may be in the left and right positional relationship. In addition, other operation means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided as the operation means.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) the effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each is provided. In the game area 7, a first path among the flow paths along which the game balls flow is provided mainly in an area on the left side of the effect display device when viewed from the front, and a first path among the flow paths along which the game balls flow. A second route different from the route is mainly provided in a region on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

  Hitting a game ball into the left area of the effect display device 9 in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is called left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area of the effect display device 9 to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is called right-handed.

  The first route and the second route may be configured by completely different routes, or may be partially shared routes. The first route is a route in which a game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area 7, and thus may be referred to as a left-hit route. Further, the second route is a route in which a game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area 7, and may be called a right-hit route.

  A movable effect member 60 is provided near a predetermined edge in the display area of the effect display device 9 (here, near the right side). The movable effect member 60 is tilted toward the left side of FIG. 1 with the lower end as a fulcrum toward the effect display device 9 by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 61 shown in FIG. A staging model that advances to the front of the display area is configured. That is, the movable effect member 60 can be changed between the non-tilt state extending in the up-down direction and the above-described tilt state by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 61 shown in FIG.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them, and a plurality of types each of which can be identified. And a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as the identification information of the second symbol.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9 and characters. The effect display device 9 is configured by a liquid crystal display (LCD), and displays on the display screen various images such as a change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. An area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area (also referred to as a symbol display area) for variably displaying three decoration symbols (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is formed. .

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). May be.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is performed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8b performs the effect display. When the special symbol change display is being executed, the effect display is performed by the effect display device 9 along with the change display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  When the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result is shown on the second special symbol display 8b. When it is derived and displayed, the effect display device 9 also derives and displays the big hit display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to a specific game state (big hit game state) as an advantageous state in which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 9, a symbol other than the symbol that is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is the same symbol). (Combination of symbols), stopped, tilted, enlarged or reduced or deformed, or multiple symbols fluctuated synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols were switched. An effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect.

  Here, the reach state is a display in which the effect symbols that have not been stopped and displayed yet continue to fluctuate when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitute a part of the big hit combination. This is a state, or a display state in which all or some of the effect symbols are synchronously fluctuating while forming all or part of the big hit combination. In other words, “reach” refers to a state in which the identification information forms a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is a reach effect display (reach effect). Also, at the time of the reach, an unusual effect may be performed by a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, at the time of the reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design or the like)) is displayed, or a background image of the effect display device 9 (hereinafter simply referred to as “background”). ) May be changed (for example, color). This change in the display of the character and the display of the background is called reach effect display. Some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach (normal reach). Such special reach is called super reach. The reach includes a normal reach, which is a basic reach, as a reach other than the special super reach. The normal reach is set so that a big hit is less likely to occur than the super reach.

  In this embodiment, in the super reach, after a reach symbol is formed, a predetermined moving image (for example, a moving image such as a predetermined character moving image) is displayed, and then in a final effect display before the display result derivation display. In addition, a complicated effect display is performed to improve the player's expectation, such as an effect of scrolling a changing medium effect symbol. In the normal reach, after the reach symbol is formed, if the type of the background image (the image forming the background of the symbol) is different from the image displayed before the reach state, without displaying the moving image described above. A relatively simple effect display is performed. In such a normal reach, for example, in the scroll state before the stop display of the final stop symbol of the middle symbol, for example, an effect in which the variable display speed is reduced from a symbol before an arbitrary number of symbols (the number of symbol arrays) such as three symbols before the symbol. Is performed, a final effect display before the display result derivation display is performed. In the normal reach, another effect display may be performed.

  After reaching the reach state, when a result other than the big hit display result is displayed in a manner in which the reach symbol is formed, the reach is referred to as a deviation. In a mode in which the reach symbol is not formed without reaching the reach state, when a shift display result is obtained, a non-reach shift is called a shift.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the first start port switch 13a. The time detected by the first starting port switch 13a corresponds to the time when a game ball has won the first starting winning port 13 or the time when a game ball has passed through the first starting winning port 13.

  Below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The variable winning prize ball device 15 is provided with a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (so-called electric tulips) that can be opened and closed by electric power above the second starting winning opening 14, and when the movable wing pieces are in a closed state, a game ball is opened. This is disadvantageous for a player who cannot enter, and when the movable wing piece is in an open state, the state is controlled to be advantageous for a player who can enter a game ball. Therefore, when the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, a game ball is more likely to win in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is difficult to win but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win).

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying the ordinary symbols that can be identified. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. The small-sized display is formed, for example, in a square shape.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a gate 32 capable of executing a variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 based on the passing of the game ball. When a game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, a variation display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning prize ball device 15 is closed for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. To an open state that is advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, there is provided an ordinary symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 32. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the symbol holding storage display 41 normally increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time when the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started, the number of the lighted LEDs is reduced by one.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened based on the variation display result of the variable display of the normal symbol display 10, the game ball is in a state where it can enter the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14. The game ball that has won the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can enter the second starting winning port 14 (the starting winning is easily performed), and the state becomes advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the open state, a game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, when the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, a game ball is more likely to win in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition) which is the execution condition of the variation display is satisfied (for example, when the game ball is played). After passing (including winning) the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as a starting winning area, the start condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of stored storages is not 0, The first special symbol and the second special symbol are in a state where the variable display is not executed and the big hit game is not executed), and the variable display time (the variable time) is changed. After elapse, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through an area that is predetermined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the game ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. It is. Deriving and displaying a display result means that a symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed. Further, with respect to the variable display in which the start condition has not been satisfied even though the game ball has entered the start region such as the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, within a predetermined upper limit number range. Storing information is called pending storage. Further, such a term “suspended storage” is also used when indicating (specifying) information that has been on-hold storage (referred to as on-hold storage information or on-hold information). As described above, the pending display is a display of a variable display that has not been started yet as a pending display.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is provided a second special symbol hold storage display 18b composed of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls in the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the number of second hold storage. Is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of effective winning balls in the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as a start memory or a start winning memory). ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted displays is reduced by one.

  The gaming machine has a hit ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch game balls into the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and thereafter descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the change display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the change display of the special symbol ends, (1) The first start condition for enabling the variable display of the special symbol to be started is satisfied), the variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the effect display device 9 is started. , The variable display of the effect symbol is started. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first start winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the first starting winning opening 13 is configured such that game balls from the first path on the left side of the effect display device 9 can be won by the arrangement of the game nails provided in the game area 7. However, it is impossible to win a game ball from the second route on the right side of the effect display device 9. Therefore, it is possible to win the game ball in the first starting winning opening 13 only when the player makes a left hit.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the change display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the change display of the special symbol ends, (2) the second start condition for enabling the variable display of the special symbol to be started is satisfied), the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the effect display device 9 , The variable display of the effect symbol is started. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the second starting winning port 14. Unless the variation display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, the second start winning opening 14 is formed by the arrangement of the game nails provided in the game area 7 between the first path on the left side of the effect display device 9 and the second path on the right side thereof. Winning of game balls from both is possible. However, since the gate 32 used as a condition for executing the variable display of the ordinary symbol, which is a condition for opening the second start winning opening 14, is provided on the second path on the right side of the effect display device 9, the second route is provided. When aiming for a winning in the starting winning opening 14, it is necessary to strike the game ball to the right to aim for the passage to the gate 32. Therefore, the game balls enter the second starting winning opening 14 mainly from the second route when the player hits right.

  The effect display device 9 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The effect symbols as symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the effect symbol are synchronized. The change display of the second special symbol and the change display of the effect symbol are synchronized. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 stops and displays the combination of the effect symbols reminiscent of the big hit as the big hit display result.

  At the lower end in the display area of the effect display device 9, an image (hereinafter, referred to as a reserved image or a reserved display) for displaying the generated reserved storage information is displayed in correspondence with the number of the reserved storage information. A display area is formed (not shown, reservation display area 18c in FIG. 16). In the suspension display area, the suspension storage information is displayed in a format in which the first suspension storage number and the second suspension storage number are distinguished. For example, in the effect display device 9, the first number of reserved storages is displayed in the left display area, and the second number of reserved storage is displayed in the right display area. By displaying the first hold display area and the second hold display area separately, the first hold storage information and the second hold storage information can be easily distinguished.

  During execution of the variable display corresponding to the suspended display deleted (moved, shifted) from the pending display area, an image showing the variable corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (hereinafter, referred to as an active image or an active display) Is formed in the center of the hold display area (not shown, active display area AHA of variable display in FIG. 16). In the active display area, it is specified that the suspended image displayed in the suspended display area corresponds to the suspended image displayed so far, for example, is moved (shifted) to the active display area. The active image is displayed in a possible manner. The active display area may be arranged at any position in the display area of the effect display device 9.

  Note that the hold display area may display the hold storage information in a display mode in which the first hold display area and the second hold display area are added together without distinction. Such a summed suspension storage display makes it easy to grasp the total number of satisfied execution conditions in which the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable prize ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and is in an open state advantageous for the player (advantageous in that the game ball can be won) and a closed state unfavorable for the player (advantageous in that the game ball cannot be won). ). A specific game state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. In the (big hit game state), the open / close plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the big winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the state where the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win).

  In the big hit game state, the repetition continuation control in which the special variable winning ball device 20 repeats the open state and the closed state is performed. In the repeat continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called a round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is determined that a big hit is made, one of the big hit types is selected.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball which does not win is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that emit sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the upper left and right sides and lower left and right sides of the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on a front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table of FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the big hit game state ends, the base after the big hit game state ends, the fluctuation time after the big hit game state ends, the number of releases in the big hit ( (Number of rounds) and the opening time of each round.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is set in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or The closed state is set when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls has been satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round) at which the predetermined upper limit is reached.

  Of the "big hits", after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the special game state is a probable change state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal game state which is not the probable change state). The type (type) of the big hit that shifts to (probable abbreviation of the probability variation state, also referred to as the high probability state) is called “probable big hit”. The special game state may be controlled to a time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shorter than the non-time reduction state, in association with the probability change state. The special game state may be controlled to the time saving state independently of the probability change state.

  As the probability variable jackpot, a first probability variable jackpot and a second probability variable jackpot as described below may be selectable. The first probability variable jackpot is one in which the number of times of opening the special winning opening is allowed to be relatively large (for example, 15 times) in the big hit gaming state, and the opening time of the special winning opening is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds). It is. The second probability-change jackpot is allowed up to a relatively small number of times (for example, two times) in which the large winning opening is opened in the big hit gaming state, and the opening time of the large winning opening is extremely short (for example, 0.1 second). Things. The first probability-change jackpot shifts to the probability-change state via a jackpot game state in which a special winning opening is opened in an open mode in which the player can easily recognize the jackpot. On the other hand, the second probability-change jackpot shifts to the probability-change state through the jackpot game state in which the big winning opening is opened in an opening mode in which the player is difficult to visually recognize. Such a second probable jackpot is a probable jackpot that makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the open state of the special winning opening, so that the player suddenly appears to be in the probable state. ”, And also abbreviated as“ probable ”.

  The shift to the time reduction state shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol, so that when the time reduction state is reached, an effective start winning is easily generated and the possibility of being controlled to the big hit game is increased. Of the big hits, the type (type) of the big hit that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15 round big hit game state is referred to as “normal big hit”.

  In addition, as a special game state, the frequency of the game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened in association with the probability changing state or the time saving state. There is a case where the electric chu support control state for facilitating prize winning in the variable prize ball device 15 (higher entry and higher frequency) is controlled. Since the electric tuner support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

  Here, the power tue support control will be described. The control of the electric chew support includes a control of shortening the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the time of deriving the display result) to quickly derive and display the display result (ordinary symbol shortening control), and an ordinary symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol becomes a hit symbol (normal symbol probability change control), control to extend the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio in which the variable prize ball device 15 is in the open state becomes higher than when the control is not performed. Is increased, and the game ball is easily started and won (the execution condition of the variable display on the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). With this control, the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 14 is increased, so that a game state is established in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol are increased.

  The state in which the winning frequency of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased by the electric chew support control (high-frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in accordance with the winning to the number of launch balls. Since the “base” is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a “high base state”. When such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is a control for facilitating winning in the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting winning with the variable winning ball device 15, that is, an electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chewing support control”.

  In this embodiment, the term “high-probability state (probable-variable state)” and “low-probability state (non-probable-variable state)” are used as terms indicating the state of the jackpot probability. , “High base state (power control support state)” and “low base state (non-power support control state)”.

  The terms “low-probability low-base state” and “high-probability high-base state” are used as terms indicating the combination of the state of the jackpot probability and the state of the base. The “low-probability low-base state” is a state that indicates that the state of the jackpot probability is the low-probability state and that the base state is the low-base state. The “high-accuracy high-base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is the high-probability state and that the state of the base is the high-base state.

  When controlled to the high-probability state, it is controlled to the time-saving state and the high-base state, but the time-saving state and the high-base state are changed to the time-saving state and the high-base state because the control start and end conditions are the same. The controlled state may be represented by the term time saving state, and may be represented by the term high base state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment has a configuration in which a game ball can enter the first starting winning opening 13 only from the first path on the left side of the effect display device 9, and thus the second starting winning is higher than the high base state. In a low base state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the mouth 14, the player generally performs a special symbol change display by aiming the game ball at the first starting winning opening 13 by left-handing. It is a target. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the gate 32 is provided in the second path on the right side of the effect display device 9, it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting winning opening 14 than in the low base state. In the high base state, it is common for the player to perform a special symbol change display by aiming at the right and hitting the game ball into the gate 32 and the second starting winning opening 14.

  Therefore, in the low base state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 14 than in the high base state, it is desirable that the player strikes left and aims for the game ball to enter the first starting winning opening 13. By being general, only the first hold storage is likely to occur, and only the hold image corresponding to the first hold storage is mainly displayed as the hold display. On the other hand, in the high base state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening 14 than in the low base state, it is desirable that the player strikes right to aim the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening 14. By being general, only the second reserved storage is likely to occur, and only the reserved image corresponding to the second reserved storage is mainly displayed as the reserved display.

  Note that the first starting winning opening 13 may allow game balls to enter from both the first route and the second route. Further, the game ball may be allowed to enter the second starting winning port 14 from only the second route. Further, the gate 32 may be provided on a first path on the left side of the effect display device 9, and both the first path on the left side of the effect display device 9 and the second path on the right side of the effect display device 9. May be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the 15 rounds of jackpots, there are provided a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probable jackpot. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled to a non-probable change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low-probability high base state) after the end of the fifteen rounds of the jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probable change state continues until the next big hit occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are changed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times, Is continued until the earlier of the condition until the occurrence of the condition is satisfied.

  The probable jackpot is a jackpot in which, after the end of the fifteenth round jackpot game state, control is performed to shift to the probable change state, the time saving state, and the high base state (highly reliable high base state). In the probable big hit, the condition that such a high-probability high base state is performed until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next big hit occurs occurs, whichever is earlier. Continue until you do.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer 560 for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created by a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the capacitor as the backup power supply). In particular, at least data corresponding to a game state, that is, a control state of the game control means (a special symbol process flag or the like) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program stored in the ROM 54, and hence the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). That is, specifically, the CPU 56 executes the control according to the program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set updating rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value based on the fact that the starting winning time is when the numerical data is read (extracted). The game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming a special winning opening in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 560 for game control is also mainly provided. It is mounted on a substrate 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying ordinary symbols, and a first special symbol holding storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage storage display 18b, and the normal symbol storage storage display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control microcomputer 100, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, a VDP 109, an I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 controls the display of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that allows a signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In addition to performing the variable display control of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Various effects control is performed by controlling the sound output of the sound.

  The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected. The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected. The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123. . The effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate. Further, on the effect control board 80, wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to a motor drive circuit 17 for driving a movable effect member motor 61 for operating the movable effect member 60 (see FIG. 1). Is also connected.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 4 shows the types of random numbers, update ranges, applications, and addition conditions. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for hit determination for determining whether to make a big hit. The random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (any type of type, normal jackpot, and probable jackpot) and the jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination and jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the variation pattern (for determining the variation pattern type). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined (for fluctuation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR5): Determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value).

  In this embodiment, a plurality of types such as a normal big hit and a probable big hit are included as the big hit in the specific game state. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the big hit type is determined based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Determined by type. Further, when the type of the big hit is determined, the big hit symbol is also determined at the same time based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). Therefore, the random number 1 is also a jackpot symbol determining random number.

  Further, the variation pattern is determined by first using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the variation pattern type, and using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) to include any of the variation pattern types determined. Is determined to be the fluctuation pattern. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type. The variation pattern type is sometimes called a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type without a reach and a reach variation pattern type that is a variation pattern type with a reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set such that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state when the display result is out of order. , The fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving state is not set. For example, in the time reduction state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set to be shorter than when the time reduction state is not shorter in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time compared to when the time reduction state is not, The rate at which the fluctuation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is increased, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time among the fluctuation pattern types is set to be high is set. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuating time is shorter than when the time saving state is not set.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal time (non-probable change state) big hit determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not the probable change state, that is, a non-probable change state), and a positive change time big hit determination table used in the probable change state.

  Each value described in the left column of FIG. 5A is set as a big hit determination value in the normal time big hit determination table, and is written in the right column of FIG. 5A in the probability change big hit determination table. Are set as the jackpot determination values. The jackpot determination value set in the probability change jackpot determination table is a common jackpot determination value (referred to as a normal jackpot determination value or a first jackpot determination value) common to the jackpot determination value set in the normal jackpot determination table. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number (10 times as many) of jackpot determination values as the jackpot determination table at the time of a probability change (referred to as a jackpot determination value at the time of a probability change or a second jackpot determination value) is set. . As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  At a predetermined time, the CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). If any of the big hit determination values shown matches, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (usually a big hit or a probable big hit). Note that “probability” illustrated in FIG. 5A indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 5 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using a hold memory (also referred to as a first hold memory) based on a game ball winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (the change display of the first special symbol is changed). It is a first special symbol big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for the first special symbol. FIG. 5 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using a hold memory (also referred to as a second hold memory) based on a game ball winning in the second starting winning opening 14 (the change display of the second special symbol is changed). It is a second special symbol big hit type determination table used when the game is performed.

  Each of the first and second special symbol big hit type determination tables shown in FIG. 5B and FIG. 5C is used for determining a big hit type when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Based on the random number (random 1), the type of the jackpot is determined to be one of “normal jackpot” and “probably variable jackpot”, and is referred to for determining a jackpot symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (B), the determination values (big hit type determination) corresponding to “normal big hit” and “probable variable big hit” are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1. Value) is set. In the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5C, the determination values (big hit type determination) that are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1 and correspond to “normal big hit” and “probable variable big hit”, respectively. Value) is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The judgment value corresponding to “normal big hit” is also set as a judgment value corresponding to “3” of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The judgment value corresponding to the “probable change big hit” is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the big hit symbol “7” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with the random 1 value matching as the jackpot type, and also determines the big hit symbol with the random 1 value matching as the jackpot symbol. I do. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5B and the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit type determination table into the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the big hit type is selected from a plurality of big hits having different maximum round numbers in the big hit game state as the big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. A setting may be made so that the ratio of selecting a jackpot type having a larger number of rounds is higher than in the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the type selection of the big hit is advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the second special symbol big hit type determination table in FIG. 5C may have a higher percentage determined to be the probability variable big hit than the first special symbol big hit type determination table in FIG. 5B. . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can be higher in the probability of the probability of a large hit than the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol big hit type determination table may be set to have a higher probability of being determined to be the probability variable big hit than the second special symbol big hit type determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used in the game control microcomputer 560 to select and determine the variation pattern of the special symbol and the effect symbol will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing, in a table form, a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern.

  FIG. 6A shows a determination table for when the normal state is out of position, and FIG. (C) shows a normal big hit determination table, and (d) shows a positive change big hit determination table. Each of the determination tables in FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54 and is selected according to a game state, and is used to determine (determine) a variation pattern type and a variation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between random 2 and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between random 3 and the variation pattern belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table in FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach the reach.

  “Normal reach” in each table in FIG. 6 indicates a fluctuation pattern of normal reach in which no particularly fancy effect is executed when in the reach state. “Super reach” indicates a fluctuation pattern in which a reach effect is displayed in which a special effect image is displayed when a reach state is attained.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the ratio selected when a big hit is high and the reliability of the big hit is high compared to “normal reach”. Further, “super reach” is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than “normal reach” (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 30 seconds to 60 seconds). Note that four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the big hit expectation (the big hit is reached) in such a relationship that first super reach <second super reach <third super reach <fourth super reach Probabilities) are high.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined effect is displayed on the effect display device 9 until the display result is derived and displayed after the display of the effect as identification information and each of the first and second special symbols is changed and displayed. An effect called a pseudo-sequence (hereinafter, referred to as a pseudo-sequence effect) as an aspect may be executed. The pseudo-ream is a pseudo-representation display that shows what appears to be a single change corresponding to one hold storage as if a plurality of changes corresponding to a plurality of hold storages are being performed continuously. Abbreviation for continuous fluctuation.

  In addition, the pseudo-ream is defined as a pattern in which the fluctuation display (variable display) of the symbol is performed a plurality of times in response to one start winning, so that the symbol is displayed within the fluctuation time determined for one start winning. Indicates a special variation pattern (also referred to as a variation display pattern) in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol rows (left, middle, right). For example, the greater the number of times of repeated execution of re-variation (the total number of variations including the initial variation and subsequent re-variations, also referred to as the number of pseudo-continuous variations), the greater the reliability of a big hit (the difference from a big hit) For all the selection ratios including the time, the degree of the ratio selected when the big hit is made, the degree of the big hit ratio, that is, the reliability of the big hit is increased. More specifically, by increasing the ratio selected when it is determined to be a big hit, it is suggested by a pseudo continuous production whether or not a big hit gaming state is set. In the variation pattern of the pseudo ream, a pseudo repetition pattern (for example, a symbol (numerals) to which a predetermined character or character or the like is attached, which is not included in an effect symbol that is normally displayed in a variation display (basically a variation display) on the effect display device 9. Symbols, which are also referred to as pseudo-serial exclusive symbols) are temporarily stopped. In addition, in the pseudo series, the effect design (for example, a numeric design or the like) that normally performs the variation display (basically the variation display) may be temporarily stopped. The combination of the symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 9 is called a combination of the temporarily stopped symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is determined to be one of the pseudo consecutive chances from a plurality of types of chances (hereinafter, referred to as pseudo consecutive chances (simulated consecutive chances)) composed of combinations of symbols other than the combination of the big hit symbols. What should be done is.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, an effect in which the effect symbol slides may be performed. Here, the slip means an effect display in which the symbol is slid from the predicted stop position immediately before the symbol stops in the variable display. In the second super-reach, after one of the two effect symbols temporarily stopped in the left-right symbol display area (combination of the missing symbols) in the left and right symbol display areas and then stopped, the reach-reach point (reach) is reached. (Combination of symbols), and a reach effect is executed.

  Note that the variation pattern shown in the out-of-offset determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is a display result of “out”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is a display result of “normal jackpot”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the probability change big hit determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “probable change big hit”.

  Based on these pieces of information, for example, the fluctuation pattern “fourth super reach (60 seconds)” shown in the column of “fluctuation pattern” in FIG. 4th super-reach variation pattern executed in seconds. "

  In the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” indicate functions as a variation pattern type determination table indicating a relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type”. Column. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, all values of random 2 (1-251) are plural for each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach”, and “super reach”. Are allocated in the numerical range of. For example, taking the example of FIG. 6A as an example, if the value of random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches any of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random numbers of 1 to 251 Is determined to be “normal reach” as the variation pattern type.

  In the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as “random three ranges” and “variation patterns” indicate functions as a variation pattern determination table unit that indicates a relationship between “random three ranges” and “variation patterns”. Column. The variation patterns shown corresponding to each type in the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of “super reach” are “first super reach”, “second super reach”, “third super reach”, and “second super reach”. 4 Super Reach ".

  All values of random 3 (1 to 220) are allocated to each of the plurality of variation patterns corresponding to each variation pattern type in a plurality of numerical value ranges. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is “super reach”, random 3 extracted at a predetermined timing is one of random numbers 1 to 220 If it matches any of the determination values assigned to ７０70, it is determined that the variation pattern is “first super reach (15 seconds)”.

  When the fluctuation display result is out of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a determination table is selected as follows to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the non-time saving state, when the result of the variable display is out of order, the out-of-normal-state out-of-state judgment table in FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, when the fluctuation display result is out of time in the time saving state, the out-of-time time state out-of-time judgment table in FIG. 6B is selected. By using the determination tables shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the reach ratio at the time of departure from the normal state and at the time of departure from the time saving state is constant regardless of the number of suspensions.

  When the fluctuation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether the time saving state is set or not, the determination table is selected as follows to determine the fluctuation pattern. When the fluctuation display result is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. If the result of the variable display is a large-variable big hit regardless of whether the time saving state is set, the large-variable big hit determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than the normal state deviation time determination table of FIG. 6A. 6B, the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including the normal reach fluctuation and the super reach fluctuation) as compared with the normal state deviation time judgment table of FIG. 6A. To reduce the percentage of reach fluctuations that are determined to be normal fluctuations (non-reach deviation fluctuations (fluctuations that result in an out-of-reach display rather than reach)), Data is set.

  As a result, compared to the non-time-saving state (normal state), the variation pattern in which the variation time is shorter is higher in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. In this case, the fluctuation display is performed with the fluctuation time shorter on average than in the case of. By selecting the determination table in this way, a time saving state can be realized. In addition, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state, it is possible to reduce the reserved consumption during the time reduction state.

  In the determination tables of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B which are selected at the time of the outlier, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship such that the normal reach> super reach. Have been. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D which are selected when a big hit occurs, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high / low relationship of a ratio such as normal reach <super reach. Data is set. As a result, when a big hit occurs, the ratio at which the super-reach reach effect is performed (the ratio of the super-reach reach effect when the reach is selected) becomes higher than at the time of the loss, so that the super-reach reach The effect can enhance the player's sense of expectation.

  In addition, the determination table of FIG. 6D that is selected when the jackpot becomes the probable variable jackpot has a lower normal reach than the determination table of FIG. 6C that is selected when the jackpot becomes the normal jackpot. On the other hand, the data is set so that the rate at which the type of super reach effect is selected becomes higher. As a result, the ratio of the super-reach's reach effect (the ratio of the super-reach's reach effect when the reach is selected) is higher when a probability change is a big hit than when it is a normal big hit. By performing the reach effect of the reach, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the probable big hit.

  It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern is obtained when the total number of reserved storages (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol for the variable display is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, the total number of total reserved storage is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different from when the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the change time is shorter than when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number. May be executed to reduce the number of holdings. However, even under conditions where the number-of-reservations reduction control is executed (for example, when the total number of stored reservations is 3 or more), by keeping the ratio of the reach (including the normal reach and the super reach) constant, the expectation for the reach is maintained. In addition, it is also possible to execute the number-of-reserved-hours reduction control so that the fluctuation time of only the super-reach among the reach is not shortened. Furthermore, the number-of-reserved-hours reduction control may be executable by making the normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time selected at a high rate, or may be executable by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of an effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. 7, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the game control state.

  The main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a fluctuation pattern of an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the fluctuation display of the special symbol (corresponding to the fluctuation pattern XX, respectively). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns as shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by that number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, upon receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the variation of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command for designating the end of the change of the first and second special symbols (symbol confirmation designation command).

  The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probable change jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening opening designation command indicating that the special winning opening is open at the number (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command after opening the special winning opening that indicates after opening (closing) the special winning opening at the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probable jackpot).

  The command A401 (H) is a first start winning designation command for designating that there is a first start winning. The command A402 (H) is a second start winning designation command for designating that there is a second start winning.

  The command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command for designating that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command for designating that the game state is the probability change state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first reserved storage number designation command for designating the first reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second reserved storage number designation command for designating the second reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  By transmitting the first reserved storage number designation command for indicating the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number designation command for indicating the second reserved storage number, the effect control microcomputer 100 The number of reserved storages can be specified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Every time the variable display is executed, a reserved storage number subtraction designation command for subtracting the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is transmitted. Thus, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be able to specify the number of storages to be held.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are prize-winning determination results such as a jackpot determination, a jackpot type determination, and a fluctuation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. This is an effect control command indicating the content. Among them, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not a big hit is to be determined from the determination results at the time of a prize, and the result of determining the type of the big hit. The command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) as to which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. It is.

  In the present embodiment, in the prize-winning effect process (see S1215 in FIG. 10), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit occurs at the time of the start prize, the type of the big hit, and the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. Is within the range of the determination values. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating a big hit type are set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. The EXT data of the variation type command is set with a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the control for transmitting the value to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning based on the value set in the symbol designating command, The variation pattern type can be recognized based on the variation type command.

  Next, a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (hold storage data) corresponding to hold storage on the game control microcomputer 560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 55.

  In the first reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a jackpot determination random number (random R) as a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) as a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number. (Random 2) and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are stored.

  Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts such random numbers from the random number circuit 503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, and outputs them to the A process of storing (storing) in the storage area of the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13, these random numbers are extracted and stored in the first holding storage buffer. Further, based on the winning in the second starting winning port 14, these random numbers are extracted and stored in the second holding storage buffer.

  The fact that the information on the starting winning prize as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “held on hold”. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted and stored in the save area in advance at the time of the start winning, but a variation pattern setting process (special (At the start of symbol fluctuation).

  As described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer is read out at the time of the start winning and used for a prefetch notice effect, and is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

  When there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation type command, a first (second) start winning designation command, and a first (second) hold. A command, such as a storage number designation command, indicating the result of the start winning determination process (for example, the winning effect process of S1215, S1225) is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. The received winning designating command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the received symbol designating command, variation type command, first (second) start winning award designating command, and first (second) winning designating command. A storage area for storing data capable of specifying a received command is secured so that various commands such as a reserved storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the effect control patterns of the effect symbols performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol correspond to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the variation display operation of the effect symbol and the reach. It is composed of data indicating control contents of various effecting operations, such as an effect displaying operation in an effect or various effecting operations that do not involve a variable display of effect symbols. The announcement effect control pattern includes data indicating control contents of an effect operation that is an announcement effect that is executed in response to an announcement pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are configured with data indicating the control contents thereof.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main process, for example, a necessary initial setting process, a normal time initializing process, a non-normal time game state restoring process, a random number circuit setting process (initial setting of the random number circuit 503), a display random number updating process (variation pattern) , Random number update processing such as determination of the type of a random number, variation pattern determination, and the like, and random number update processing for an initial value (update processing of the initial value of the count value of the normal random number generation counter for symbol per contact determination) and the like.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been reached) is executed (S20). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the states of these are determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the ordinary symbol display 10, the first special symbol reservation storage display 18a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b, the ordinary symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the ordinary symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each of the determination random numbers such as the normal symbol hit determination random number and the big hit type determination random number used in the game control is performed (determination random number updating process: S23). . The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The value of the flag is updated according to the gaming state.

  Next, a normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the ordinary symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to an ordinary symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the ordinary symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order, and changes the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to a game state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information and the like supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for performing a special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the ordinary symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in the output buffer for setting the ordinary symbol display control data according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag ( S33). In addition, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10.

  Thereafter, an interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends. According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every predetermined time.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, a start port switch passing process is executed (S312). Then, any one of S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the gaming control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores the reserved storage data (first reserved storage data) such as the random number for the jackpot determination obtained based on the winning start in the first starting winning opening 13 as described above. A first holding storage buffer to be stored, and a second holding storage buffer for storing holding storage data (second holding storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on a winning start in the second starting winning opening 14. Is provided. In each of these reserved storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each reserved storage is secured.

  In the starting port switch passing process, if the first starting port switch 13a is ON, the number of stored first reserved storage data is set on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved storage number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for determining a big hit, a random number for determining a variation pattern, and a variation pattern determination) are output from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. (A random number for use) is extracted and stored (stored) in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is on, the second number of stored second reserved storage data is counted on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the reserved storage number counter is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for determining a jackpot, a random number for determining a variation pattern, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed.

  Regarding the following description relating to the hold storage, the fact that the information regarding the starting winning as described above is stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as “hold storage”. The numerical data stored in the first storage buffer may be referred to as first storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second storage buffer may be referred to as second storage information.

  The processing of S300 to S307 is as follows. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining a big hit type in the case of a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number), and counts the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for performing control such as the start of timing of a variable time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process of controlling transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol change process (S303) is a process in which the process proceeds to a special symbol stop process when the change time of the change pattern selected in the change pattern setting process has elapsed. The special symbol stop process (S304) is to display the variation display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is measured by the variation time timer. This is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stopped symbol.

  The special winning opening process (S305) is a process for controlling the special winning opening in the special variable winning sphere device 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), the control for transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect in the big hit game state to the effect controlling microcomputer 100 and the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening are confirmed. This is processing for performing processing and the like. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining round, the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening process (S305). When all rounds have been completed, the process shifts to big hit end processing (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process of performing control or the like for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in S312. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first starting port switch 13a is on (S1211). If the first starting port switch 13a is not on, the flow shifts to S1221. If the first startup port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage for counting the first reserved storage number). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to S1221.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved storage number counter by one (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, Stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize-winning effect process in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined at the time of the start prize (S1215).

  In this embodiment, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, and after various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as the hold storage information, the start of the variable display is started. When the condition is satisfied, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S300), the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) for which the variable display is started is changed based on the hold storage information. The determination as to whether or not the display result is the big hit display result, and the big hit type determination are performed based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. In the variation pattern setting process (S301), the determination of the variation pattern (including the determination of the variation pattern type) is performed based on the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random numbers described above. Perform based on

  On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the variable display based on the winning start in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, specifically, the game ball is set to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. At the timing when the winning prize port 13 or the second starting prize port 14 is started (time when the stored storage information is stored), the stored storage information storing various data obtained at the time of the starting prize is prefetched, and the prefetched reservation is performed. Based on the stored information, the determination of whether or not to be a big hit, the determination of the type of the big hit, and the determination of the variation pattern are determined in accordance with the above-described various random numbers, the big hit determination value, the big hit type determination value , And a prize-winning effect process for pre-reading based on the fluctuation pattern type determination value. By doing so, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the fluctuation display result is predicted in advance before the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of starting winning, the effect symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a look-ahead notice that gives a notice of a big hit (the possibility of a big hit) during the fluctuation display.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect processing (S1216), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The control is performed (S1217). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), and sets the value of the first reserve storage number counter to EXT data to designate the first reserve storage number. Control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1219).

  By executing the processing of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, the first state is performed regardless of the gaming state (high-probability state, low-probability state, high-base state, low-base state, big-hit game state, and the like). Each time the start winning port 13 is started, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning at the first starting winning opening 13 occurs, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first start winning designation command, A set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second starting port switch 14a is on (S1221). If the second starting port switch 14a is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the number of second reserved storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the number of second reserved storages). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by one (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a jackpot determination random number (random R), a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted. Stored in the storage area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes the winning effect processing as described in S1215 (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect process (S1226), and controls to transmit the fluctuation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is performed (S1227). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), and sets the value of the second reserved storage number counter to EXT data to designate the second reserved storage number. Control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1229).

  By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as the high probability state, the low probability state, the high base state, the low base state, the big hit game state), the second state Every time the start winning port 14 is started, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a second starting winning designation command, A set of four commands of the total number of reserved storage number designation command is transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer has pending storage data (S51). If neither the first hold storage buffer nor the second hold storage buffer has the hold storage data, a process (not shown) for transmitting a customer wait demonstration designation command designating execution of the customer wait demonstration display is performed. Thereafter, this process ends.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 56 checks whether or not there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol) is set. Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no hold storage data in the second hold storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 8a will be described below in accordance with whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. And the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display 8a performs a variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. It is. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol display 8b displays the variation of the second special symbol on the basis of the hold storage data stored in the second hold storage buffer. Is performed.

  According to the control of S52 to S54, if at least one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display 8b based on the data of the second reserved storage is: It is executed prior to the variable display of the first special symbol display 8a based on the data of the first hold storage.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 sets each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by one, and sets the value of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one, and the content of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer is shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 sets the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the symbols stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S57). In this case, when the value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number designation command. When a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit a second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first starting winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first special symbol. , Or data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second starting winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol. Data is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out a random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer, and executes the big hit determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 extracts and stores in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in S214 of the start-up switch passing process or S224 of the start-up switch pass process, and reads out to the random number buffer in the specific symbol normal process. The big hit determination is performed for the big hit determination random numbers stored and stored. The big hit determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined big hit determination value (see FIG. 5) with a big hit determination random number and, when they match, determining a big hit. That is, it is a program for executing the process of determining a big hit.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that the probability of a big hit is higher when the game state is in the probable change state (high probability state) than in the non-probable change state (normal game state and time saving state). ing. More specifically, the large-hit-judgment-judgment table (a table in the ROM 54 in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 5A is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, A normal-time jackpot determination table (a table in the ROM 54 in which numerical values on the left side of FIG. 5A are set) that is set to be smaller than the time-and-big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is in the probable change state. When the gaming state is in the probable change state, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining a big hit using the probable change time big hit determination table, and the game state is normally set. During the gaming state or the time saving state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal time big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number (random R) for jackpot determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (S61), the process proceeds to S71. In addition, to determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display is a big hit symbol. But also.

  Whether or not the current game state is the probable change state is determined based on whether or not the probable change flag is set. The certainty change flag is set when the game state is shifted to the certainty change state, and is reset when the certainty change state ends. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game, and thereafter, one of a condition that a predetermined number of times (100 times) of fluctuation display is performed and a condition that the next big hit is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the special symbol is reset at the timing when the change display of the special symbol is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in S61), the process proceeds to S75 described later.

  If the value of the random number for big hit determination (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in S61, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (S71). The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types, a first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B and a second special symbol jackpot type in FIG. One of the determination tables is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5B.

  When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table in FIG. 5C.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random number for jackpot type determination, which is extracted in the starting port switch passing process, stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and read and stored in the random number buffer in the specific symbol normal process, Using the big hit type determination table selected in S72, a big hit type and a big hit symbol corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer are determined (S73).

  As shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the relationship between the big hit type and the big hit symbol is set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol such that the big hit symbol differs for each big hit type. Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control according to the big hit type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  The CPU 56 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is “probable change jackpot”, “02” is set as the jackpot type data.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). More specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, the symbol "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. If the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol determined in S73 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "normal big hit", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the big hit type is determined to be "probable big hit", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the change pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process process.

  In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit flag is set (S91). When the jackpot flag is set, it is determined that the jackpot is to be set, and the CPU 56 determines which state among the jackpot type information stored in S74 and the non-time saving state and the time saving state. As a table used to determine the variation pattern type and the variation pattern in accordance with the time saving information indicating the normal state out-of-office determination table and the time saving state shown in FIG. One of the out-of-office judgment table, the normal big-hit judgment table, and the probability-change big-hit judgment table is selected.

  Here, the time saving information is information indicating whether or not the employee is in the time saving state. The time saving information is set at the end of the big hit game state, and is reset when the variable display as a result of the loss display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) in the time saving state (the next big hit). It is also reset once a gaming state occurs.) When the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction information indicates the time reduction state, and when the time reduction flag is not set, the time reduction information indicates the non-time reduction state.

  If the big hit flag is set in S91, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit based on the big hit type data stored in S74 (S92). If it is a probability variation big hit, the probability variation big hit determination table of FIG. 6D is selected (S93), and the process proceeds to S114. On the other hand, if it is a normal big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected (S94), and the process proceeds to S114.

  If the big hit flag is not set in S91, that is, if the big hit is missed, it is confirmed whether or not the time reduction flag is set (S95). If the time reduction flag is not set, the normal state out-of-state determination table shown in FIG. 6A is selected (S96), and the process proceeds to S114. On the other hand, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 6B is selected (S97), and the process proceeds to S114.

  Thereby, as a table used to determine the variation pattern type and the variation pattern according to the game state, based on the selection condition of the determination table as described above, the normal state deviation time determination table shown in FIG. One of the time saving state loss time determination table, the normal big hit time determination table, and the probability change big hit time determination table is selected.

  Next, in S114, the CPU 56 reads out the random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) from the random number buffer, and refers to the data of the variation pattern type determination table in the determination table selected in the processing of S93, S94, S96, or S97. Thus, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S114).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random number 3 (the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) from the random number buffer, and in the determination table selected in the processing of S93, S94, S96 or S97, relates to the fluctuation pattern type determined in S114 in the fluctuation pattern determination table section. By referring to the data, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (S115).

  Next, control is performed to transmit an effect control command (a change pattern command) corresponding to the determined change pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S116). Then, a first symbol variation designation command or a second symbol variation designation command is transmitted as a command for designating the start of variation of the special symbol indicated by the special symbol pointer between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S117).

  Further, the change of the special symbol is started (S118). For example, by setting a start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32, the variable display is displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b as described above. Let it start. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the data indicating "second" is specified in the special symbol pointer. Is set, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is started. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S119). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S120).

  In the above-described display result designation command transmission process (S302), the CPU 56 selects one of the display result 1 designation command to the display result 3 designation command for designating the display result in accordance with the determined type of jackpot or the loss. The control for transmitting the effect control command (see FIG. 7) is performed.

  In the above-described special symbol change processing (S303), the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer, and when the variable time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop processing (S304). The value is updated, and the process proceeds to the special symbol stop processing.

  If the result of the fluctuation display indicates a big hit, the big win game opening pre-process (S305), the big win opening process (S306), and the big hit end process (S307) are executed to control the big hit gaming state. Is done. In the big hit end processing (S307), the probable change flag and the time saving flag are set at the time of the end of the probability changing big hit, and the time saving flag is set at the end of the normal big hit. Thus, after the end of the jackpot, the state is controlled to the probable change state and the time saving state.

  The time-saving state after the probability change big hit and the normal big hit needs to be continued until one of the conditions until the change display is executed 100 times or until the next big hit occurs. In such a continuous period of 100 variable displays, in the big hit end process (S307), the time reduction counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be varied in the time reduction state is set to 100 times, and thereafter, every time the variable display is executed. In the special symbol stop process, control is performed by subtracting and updating, and the time saving flag is reset based on the count-up of the time saving number counter, so that the time saving state is terminated.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, an initialization process for clearing a RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining a start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control is performed (S701). ). Then, effect control CPU 101 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. In the effect control main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control processing, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can specify the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) and the like (command analysis processing: S704). Next, effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (S705). In the effect control process processing, in order to perform various effects such as a variation display of effect symbols on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control among the processes according to the control state is performed. The effect corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected and effect control is executed.

  Next, the random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol) A random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the variable display is executed (S706), and each of such random numbers SR1-1 to SR7 is obtained by counting the random counter for updating the count value by software. Each of them is cyclically updated within a predetermined range, and is extracted at a predetermined timing and used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving or deleting the hold display, etc.) is executed (S707). In the hold storage display control process of S707, display control of an active display (active display) displayed in the active display area is also performed. Specifically, display control is performed in the following processing. For example, in the process of S704, a predetermined first update flag is set when a variable display is received, and a predetermined second update flag is set when a variable display is received. If the first update flag is set, in the process of S707, one first hold display in the hold display area is deleted, and the remaining first hold displays are moved one by one toward the active display area. The display is shifted to update the display in the hold display area, and if the variable display second update flag is set, one second hold display in the hold display area is deleted in the process of S707, and the remaining second hold is displayed. The display is shifted one by one in the direction of the active display area to update the display of the hold display area, and after the variable display, the process proceeds to S702.

  By executing such an effect control main process, in the effect control microcomputer 100, in response to the effect control command transmitted and received from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the like. By controlling the effect devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various effect controls according to the game state are performed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect, and executes the prefetch effect process (S700) for selecting the type of the prefetch effect, and then sets the value of the effect control process flag. Of any of S800 to S807 in accordance with.

  In the effect control process processing, the following processing is executed. In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variation display of the effect symbol is realized. However, the control relating to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also performed in the second special symbol. The control relating to the variation display of the effect symbols synchronized with the variation of the effect is also executed in one effect control process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S700) is a process of performing pre-reading determination, such as whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect, and determining an effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect refers to the pre-reading of the hold information and the change of the special symbol based on the hold information before the order of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on certain hold information (hold storage information) arrives. This is an effect technique in which the content of the display is determined, and how the special symbol in the future will be changed is displayed at an earlier stage. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, before the variable display based on the hold information is executed, a big hit occurs later based on the display mode of the hold display or the active display mode corresponding to the hold information. An effect of giving a notice of a possibility (see FIG. 17 and the like) is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the hold information (hold storage information) targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target hold information (hold storage information)”. The variable display based on the hold information targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target variable display”. Further, the hold display based on the hold information targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target hold display”, and the active display based on the hold information targeted for the prefetch effect is referred to as “target active display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process of performing a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process proceeds to the effect symbol variation start process.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling so that the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is started. The effect symbol fluctuation process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (variation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop processing (S803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the variation display (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S804) is a process of performing a display control such as a control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit after the end of the fluctuation time. The processing during the round (S805) is processing for performing display control during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the process proceeds to the post-round process. If the final round has ended, the process proceeds to the big hit end process. The post-round processing (S806) is processing for performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the processing shifts to the mid-round processing. The big hit end effect process (S807) is a process of performing display control on the effect display device 9 to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  The effect control CPU 101 controls the processes stored in the ROM 102 from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The control of the effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 is performed according to the process data set in the table.

  The process table includes a process timer set value and data obtained by collecting a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variable display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. In the process timer set value, a variation time in the variation mode is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control for displaying the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, information on the variable display of the hold storage information displayed on hold is pre-read before the variable display based on the hold storage information is executed, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the pre-read result is displayed. Based on the prefetched pending storage information as a target, an effect control for executing a prefetch effect as a specific effect at a predetermined timing is executed by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 15 is a look-ahead effect type table showing the relationship between the type of the look-ahead effect, the contents of the look-ahead effect, and the start time of the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect type table is stored in the ROM 102. As shown in FIG. 15, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a plurality of types of look-ahead effects such as a chance eye advance effect, a background change advance effect, a hold change advance effect, and a zone advance effect can be executed.

  The chance eye announcement effect is a look-ahead effect in which a display result of a combination of specific symbols called a chance eye (for example, a combination of a predetermined odd number of symbols) is displayed in a plurality of fluctuation displays before the target fluctuation display. In this embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of chance eye announcement effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different is used as the chance eye announcement effect. Note that the chance notice announcement effect may use only one type of fixed chance notice announcement effect pattern.

  For example, the plurality of chance eye announcement effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different are, for example, a first chance eye announcement effect pattern in which the display color of the effect symbol when the opportunity eye is stopped and displayed is blue. And a second chance notice effect pattern in which the display color is green, and a third chance notice effect pattern in which the display color is red. These plural kinds of chance eye announcement effect patterns are selected for each display result such that the expectation to be a big hit has a magnitude relationship of, for example, “blue <green <red” with respect to the display color of the effect symbol at the time of the chance eye stop display. The percentage is set.

  Such selection of the chance eye announcement effect pattern is performed using the chance eye announcement effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the chance eye announcement presentation mode selection table, the random number SR6 updated by the above-described random number update process (S706) is used to set the random number SR6 for the chance announcement announcement aspect selection so that the above-described selection ratio can be realized. It is associated with the effect pattern. In the chance notice announcement effect mode selection table, a chance notice announcement effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  In this embodiment, a combination of symbols having a wide variation range such as a combination of odd symbols is used as a chance. For example, a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right symbols are "1, 2, 3" is used. It is also possible to use a combination of symbols having a narrow variation width such that only the chance eyes are provided.

  In the background change announcement effect, a predetermined background image (such as a background image constituting the background of the effect design) that is usually used is changed to a special background image in a plurality of fluctuation displays before the target fluctuation display and displayed. This is a look-ahead production. In this embodiment, as the background change announcement effect, one of a plurality of types of background change announcement effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different is used. Note that the background change announcement effect may use only one type of fixed background change announcement effect.

  The plurality of types of background change announcement effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different include, for example, a first background change announcement effect pattern in which the special background image is the first special background image, and a special background image in the second case. (2) A second background change announcement effect pattern serving as a special background image, and a third background change announcement effect pattern serving as the third special background image as the special background image. The plurality of types of background change notice effect patterns are such that the degree of expectation to be a big hit in the special background image is, for example, a magnitude relationship of “first special background image <second special background image <third special background image”. The selection ratio is set for each display result.

  The selection of such a background change announcement effect pattern is performed using a background change announcement effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the background change announcement effect mode selection table, the background change advance notice is selected so that the random number SR7 for background change announcement effect mode selection updated by the above-described random number update process (S706) can achieve the above-described selection ratio. It is associated with the effect pattern. In the background change announcement effect mode selection table, a background change announcement effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number SR7 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  The hold change announcement effect is a look-ahead effect in which the display mode of the hold image displayed in the hold display area is changed a predetermined number of times (one or more times) before the target change display. In the following description, a variable display in which a prefetch effect is executed may be referred to as a prefetch effect change.

  In the hold change effect, for example, the following change of the display mode of the hold image is possible. The image appearing and displayed in the normal color (yellow) can be changed to a white, blue, green, or red image. The image appearing and displayed in white can be changed to a blue, green, or red image. The image appearing and displayed in blue can be changed to a green or red image. The image appearing and displayed in green can be changed to a red image. As described above, in the pending change effect, the change effect of the display mode can be executed in the change mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit increases. In addition, in the hold change effect, the change effect of the display mode may be executed in a change mode in which the degree of expectation of a big hit becomes low.

  In this embodiment, any of the plurality of types of the pending change announcement effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit is different is selected and used as the pending change announcement effect.

  As a plurality of types of hold change announcement effect patterns set so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different, for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit is set to “normal color (yellow) A plurality of types of pending change effect patterns are set so as to have a magnitude relationship of <white <blue <green <red>. Further, among the plurality of types of holding change effect patterns, an effect pattern in which the holding change is executed only once and an effect pattern in which the holding change is executed a plurality of times are included.

  The plurality of types of the pending change announcement effect patterns are selected according to the display result so that the display color of the finally displayed pending image has a magnitude relationship of “normal color (yellow) <white <blue <green <red”. Is set.

  Such a selection of the pending change announcement effect pattern is performed using the on-hold change announcement effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the hold change announcement effect form selection table, the hold change advance notice is selected such that the random number R8 for holding change notice effect state selection, which is updated by the above-described random number update process (S706), can realize the selection ratio as described above. It is associated with the effect pattern. In the hold change notice effect mode selection table, a hold change notice effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number R8 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  The zone announcement effect is a look-ahead effect in which a shutter image is displayed, and then a special background image is combined with a normally used predetermined background image. The zone announcement effect is started when the first starting opening of the game ball is awarded or when the fluctuation display is being performed. The shutter image is an image displayed in a plurality of variable displays or a target variable display before the target variable display. In the shutter image, in addition to the image imitating the shutter, an image in which characters such as characters dedicated to a zone or non-zone only are displayed with various expressions in front of the shutter is displayed. The special background image is an image displayed in a band shape on the upper and lower sides of the screen, and is an image in which characters of “CHANCE ZONE” are continuously displayed.

  When the shutter image is displayed in a plurality of variable displays before the variable display of the target, a special background image is displayed instead of the shutter image when the variable display of the target starts. When the shutter image is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the hold storage information of the target, the shutter image is displayed for a short time, for example, one second when the reach is established or the super reach is developed, and then the special background image is displayed.

  In this embodiment, in the zone announcement effect, as the zone announcement effect pattern, an effect pattern of a pattern in which the movable effect member 60 operates and a pattern in which the movable effect member 60 does not operate when the special background image is displayed. In this embodiment, the operation pattern of the movable effect member 60 is one pattern, but the operation pattern of the movable effect member 60 may be a plurality of patterns. In addition, the zone announcement effect may be such that only the pattern in which the movable effect member 60 operates is provided with the effect pattern of the pattern in which the movable effect member 60 operates and the pattern in which the movable effect member does not operate, or only the pattern in which the movable effect member 60 does not operate is used. You may.

  The degree of expectation of a big hit is set to be different depending on whether an effect pattern in which the movable effect member 60 operates is executed or not. The selection ratio such that the big hit when the effect pattern in which the movable effect member 60 is operated is higher than the big hit when the effect pattern in which the movable effect member 60 is not operated is executed. Is set.

  Such a zone announcement effect pattern selection is performed using a zone announcement effect mode selection table stored in the ROM 102. In the zone announcement effect mode selection table, the random number SR6 for zone announcement effect mode selection updated by the above-described random number updating process (S706) is applied to each zone announcement effect pattern such that the selection ratio as described above can be realized. Are associated. In the zone announcement effect mode selection table, a zone announcement effect pattern corresponding to the value of the random number SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing is selected.

  The plurality of types of pre-reading effects include a case in which only one type of effect is executed and a case in which a plurality of types of effects are executed in parallel in response to one change display. Note that, as the pre-reading effect, in addition to the effect described above, other types of notice effects such as a dialogue notice effect, an active display change effect, and the like may be made executable.

  The serif announcement effect is, for example, a scene in which a character image such as a person image that can be displayed separately from the effect pattern and the background image makes a special word different from the usual speech in a predetermined number of times of variable display. This is a look-ahead effect that performs an effect to be displayed. The active display change effect is to display the display mode of the active image displayed in the active display area in a special display mode different from the normal display mode in a plurality of variable displays before the target variable display. It is a look-ahead production.

  FIG. 16 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 for explaining the prefetch effect. Here, among the pre-reading effects, a pre-reading effect for displaying a notification image, specifically, a chance eye advance effect, a background advance effect, and a hold change advance effect will be described. Of the pre-reading effects, the zone announcement effect has a different display mode, and will be described following the description using FIGS. 16 and 17. When executing the zone announcement effect, a notification image may be displayed in the same manner as in the prefetch effect.

  In FIG. 16, as the basic display images on the effect display device 9, left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93, a hold image H in the hold display area 18c, and an active display area AHA. An active image AH is shown. In FIG. 16, in the left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, and 93, the state during the fluctuation display is indicated by a downward arrow, and the state during the fluctuation stop is indicated by a numerical symbol.

  FIG. 16A shows a display state when a prefetch effect is not performed. FIG. 16 (B1) shows a display state when a chance eye announcement effect is executed as a prefetch effect. FIG. 16 (B2) shows a display state when a background change notice effect is being executed as a prefetch effect. FIG. 16 (B3) shows a display state when a pending change announcement effect is executed as a prefetch effect.

  When the chance chance notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16 (B1), at the time of derivation display of the fluctuation display result at the end of each of the plurality of fluctuation displays in which the effect is executed, a predetermined chance is formed. The effect of stopping and displaying the effect symbol combination is performed.

  When the background change notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16 (B2), at the start of the first change display of a plurality of change displays in which the effect is executed, the background design changes from the normal background design to the special background design. After that, an effect of continuously displaying a special background symbol in a plurality of variable displays is performed.

  When the hold change notice effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 16 (B3), during the change display of one or more change displays in which the effect is executed (when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the effect display), After the image H is temporarily transformed into a star shape and emitted and displayed, an effect of changing the display mode (display color) of the reserved image H is performed. The hold image for the hold display can be displayed in different display modes depending on the degree of expectation that the variable display result becomes the big hit display result, that is, the ease of display when the big hit display result is obtained. For example, the reserved image is displayed in a predetermined shape such as a circle, for example, and can be displayed in different image colors depending on the degree of expectation that the variable display result becomes the big hit display result.

  The reserved image has a magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation such as normal color (yellow) <white <blue <green <red, and it is possible to indicate the degree of expectation that a big hit occurs in an aspect (color aspect) where the degree of expectation differs depending on the type of image color It is. Based on the occurrence of the new hold storage information, when the effect display device 9 displays a display in which a hold image corresponding to the new hold storage information appears, the new hold image has a normal color (yellow), white, It is displayed in a display mode such as blue, green, or red. When the hold image is changed to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation degree due to the hold change announcement effect, the player's sense of expectation for the jackpot can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that, as the pending change announcement effect in this embodiment, an effect in which the color of the suspended image is changed is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect in which the shape of the suspended image is changed is executed as the pending change announcement effect. You may. As the suspension change notice effect, an effect in which the size of the hold image changes may be executed. As the suspended change announcement effect, an effect in which the type of the suspended image changes may be executed. As the suspension change notice effect, an effect in which an image added to the suspension image changes may be executed. Further, an effect by a combination of any one of a color change, a shape change, a size change, a type change, and an additional image change may be executed. As described above, as the pending change announcement effect, any effect may be executed as long as the effect changes the display mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 (B1) to 16 (B3), when any one of a plurality of types of look-ahead effects such as a chance eye advance effect, a background change advance effect, and a hold change advance effect, is performed. By displaying the prefetching notification image 94 that displays the characters “prefetching” in a telop display mode as a common notification image, it is notified that the prefetching effect is being performed in a common mode regardless of the type of prefetching effect. The effect of the pre-reading notification (predetermined notification) is executed. In this way, in response to the execution of the look-ahead effect as the specific effect, the pre-reading notification in the common mode is executed regardless of the type of the look-ahead effect, so that the player can determine whether or not the look-ahead effect is being performed. It becomes easy to recognize, and the recognizability of a plurality of types of pre-reading effects can be improved.

  In addition, as described above, for each of a plurality of types of look-ahead effects such as a chance eye announcement effect, a background change announcement effect, and a hold change announcement effect, a plurality of types of effect modes (effect patterns) are provided. The look-ahead effect can be executed in the effect mode selected from among the effect modes, but when such a look-ahead effect of a chance eye advance effect, a background change advance effect, and a pending change advance effect is performed, In any of the effect modes, effect control is performed to display the pre-reading notification image 94 displaying the above-mentioned character "pre-reading" in the telop display mode as a common notification image. As a result, for each type of pre-reading effect, a pre-reading notification effect of notifying that the pre-reading effect is being performed in a common manner is executed regardless of the type of the effect form. This makes it easier for the player to recognize whether or not a prefetch effect is being performed, and it is possible to improve the recognizability of the prefetch effect in a plurality of types of effect modes.

  In addition, as described above, in a plurality of types of look-ahead effects such as a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a hold change notice effect, a look-ahead notice image that displays the character “reading ahead” in a telop display mode. When an effect control for displaying 94 as a common notification image is performed, and when each look-ahead effect of a chance eye advance effect, a background change advance effect, and a hold change advance effect is performed, a plurality of types of each look-ahead effect are performed. Also, the effect control of displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 that displays the character “during pre-reading” in the telop display mode as a common notification image is performed, thereby determining whether the pre-reading effect is being performed. This makes it easier for the user to recognize, and the recognizability of a plurality of types of prefetching effects can be further improved.

  As the pre-reading notification, the following notification may be executed in addition to or instead of the pre-reading notification image 94. First, it may be notified that a sound such as “during pre-reading” is output from the speaker 27. Further, as the pre-reading notification, a notification such as outputting a sound such as “pre-reading” from the speaker 27 without displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 may be used. As an example of performing the pre-reading notification by voice, the notification may be performed by outputting a special sound that is not output in a normal game state. As the pre-reading notification, the notification may be performed by operating a movable body such as a predetermined accessory. In addition, as the pre-reading notification, a display that can specify “pre-reading” may be displayed on another display device without displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 on the effect display device 9. Other display devices in that case include various display devices such as a sub-display device (small image display device or the like) smaller than the effect display device 9 and a dot matrix display device. In addition, a display that can specify that “pre-reading is in progress” means a character that can specify that pre-reading is in progress, a predetermined figure that can specify that pre-reading is in progress, and a specification that indicates that pre-reading is in progress. Any display may be used as long as it is possible to directly or indirectly specify that a prefetch is being performed, such as a possible predetermined number. In addition, the pre-reading notification may be performed in an effect mode in which a plurality of any of the various notification modes described above are combined.

  In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, when performing a variable display of an effect symbol, when performing a prefetching effect as a specific effect, various effects such as a reach effect performed on the variable display, and a prefetching There is a case where the difference in the production from the production is ambiguous, and it is difficult for a player who looks at such a production at first glance to judge whether or not the pre-reading production is executed, and the level of understanding of the production is insufficient. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest in the game may not be improved. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the pre-reading notification is performed in a common mode corresponding to a plurality of types of pre-reading effects, so it is clear that the pre-reading effect is being executed. Can be notified. Thus, by executing the pre-reading notification in the common mode, even the aforementioned first-time player can easily determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is being performed, and the level of understanding of the effect is insufficient. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  FIG. 17 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a pre-reading notification end effect for terminating the pre-reading notification when the pre-reading notification is executed. In FIG. 17, the display state of the effect display device 9 is shown over time. In FIG. 17, the pre-reading notification end effect for the pre-reading notification when the hold change notice effect is executed is shown as a representative example. However, the pre-reading notification end effect shown in FIG. 17 is used in other types of pre-reading effects. Is executed similarly.

  In a plurality of fluctuation displays during the effect period in which the pending change announcement effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 17A, pre-reading notification is performed by displaying a pre-reading notification image 94. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (B) and 17 (C), in the variable display time of the prefetch determination target, as in the case of the immediately preceding variable display time shown in FIG. The pre-reading notification is executed from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 17C, the pre-reading notification by displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 is continuously executed even after the end of the variable display of the pre-read determination target. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17D, the pre-reading notification by displaying the pre-reading notification image 94 also continues at the start of the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display time immediately after (the next time) the fluctuation display time of the pre-read determination target. As shown in FIG. 17 (D), the display of the pre-reading notification image 94 is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, thereby terminating the pre-reading notification.

  FIG. 18 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 when the zone notice effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 18A, the zone notice effect is a zone notice effect in which the shutter image 300S is displayed while the shutter is closed, and a special background image 300T is formed in a band shape at the top and bottom of the screen as shown in FIG. , And a zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened, which is displayed on the screen. In the zone announcement effect during shutter closing shown in FIG. 18A, the first special character 300C1, the second special character 300C2, the third special character, and the like (see FIG. 33D) pose in front of the shutter image 300S. An image which is displayed while changing clothes or clothes is displayed. In the zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened shown in FIG. 18B, an image according to the effect similar to the normal reach effect (including the normal reach effect and the super reach effect) is displayed together with the special background image 300T. In addition, FIG. 18 (A) shows the middle decorative design 5C, and FIG. 18 (B) shows the left decorative design 5L, the middle decorative design 5C, and the right decorative design 5R. I have.

  FIG. 19 shows an example of specific settings for displaying various images on the screen of the effect display device 9. FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of a Z value setting table for allocating Z values to a plurality of display layers. FIG. 19B shows an arrangement example of each display layer based on the setting of the Z value by the Z value setting table. In this embodiment, the plurality of layers include a small symbol display layer, a zone effect display layer, a change effect display layer, and an effect symbol display layer. On the small symbol display layer, an effect image showing a small symbol variably displayed in the small symbol display area is drawn. The small symbol display area is a display area in which, when a predetermined condition is established, the variable display of the small symbol, which is an effect symbol reduced from the normal effect symbol, is performed in synchronization with the variable symbol of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. is there. The zone effect display layer displays a hold image used in the hold display change effect, a shutter image when a zone notice effect is executed, and a notice effect image indicating a dedicated character image dedicated to the zone notice effect. When the shutter image is completely displayed on the zone effect display layer, the shutter image is displayed in the entire area (or most of the area) of the display area in the zone effect display layer. In the change effect display layer, an effect image showing a character or the like used in the active display change effect is drawn. In the effect symbol display layer, an effect image showing an effect symbol that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas is drawn. In the image data of the effect image drawn on each display layer, a Z value serving as a depth value used when each effect image is superimposed and drawn is set. By setting the Z value in the Z value setting table as shown in FIG. 19A, the Z value of the effect image drawn on each of the small symbol display layer, the change effect display layer, and the effect symbol display layer becomes the effect image. Have different values depending on the display layer on which the image is drawn.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 is provided with a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) and a VRAM (Video RAM) in addition to the above-described VDP (Video Display Processor) as a configuration used for image processing. In the effect control microcomputer 100, for example, when the VDP writes the image data read from the CGROM into the frame buffer of the VRAM or the like, the priority may be determined by performing a Z value comparison operation. Then, the image data of the effect image having a small Z value is written to the frame buffer in preference to the image data of the effect image having a large Z value. As a result, the effect image drawn on the display layer to which a small value is assigned as the Z value has a higher priority than the effect image to be drawn on the display layer to which a large value is assigned. Can be placed on the side.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (B), the small symbol display layer on which the effect image showing the small symbol that is variably displayed in the small symbol display area (the area indicated by the downward arrow) is drawn is the most viewed from the player. The Z value is set so as to be arranged on the front side. Therefore, even when a display effect is performed by displaying an arbitrary effect image on the screen of the effect display device 9, the display of the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V is always visible to the player. In addition, the Z value is set so that the zone effect display layer is located behind the small symbol display layer but ahead of the other layers. For this reason, when the zone announcement effect is performed, the small symbols in the small symbol display area 5V are displayed, but the characters used in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect displayed on the change effect display layer. , And effect images showing effect symbols that are variably displayed in the “left,” “medium,” and “right” effect symbol display areas of the effect symbol display layer are difficult for the player to recognize due to the shutter image. Or become impossible.

  The change effect display layer is a display layer that provides an effect area in which effect images used in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect are displayed, and is behind the small symbol display layer. The Z value is set so as to be located on the front side further than the above. Thereby, the effect image used in the hold display change effect and the active display change effect can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the effect symbol. As described above, the effect image indicating the change effect character can be arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image indicating the effect design serving as the identification information image.

  It should be noted that the Z value may be set so that the zone effect display layer is disposed on the front side as viewed from the player with respect to the small symbol display layer. In this case, when the zone announcement effect is performed, the effect images displayed on the display layers other than the zone effect display layer, including the effect images indicating the small symbols displayed on the small symbol display layer, are played by the shutter image. Becomes difficult or impossible for a person to see.

  FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating various determination tables for determining whether to execute a prefetch effect. FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (C) show a chance eye announcement effect presence / absence determination table used to determine whether or not to execute a chance eye announcement effect. FIGS. 20 (D) to 20 (F) show background change announcement effect presence / absence determination tables used to determine whether or not to execute a background change announcement effect. FIGS. 20 (G) to (I) show a pending change announcement effect presence / absence determination table used to determine whether or not to execute a hold change announcement effect. FIGS. 20 (J) to (L) show zone announcement effect presence / absence determination tables used to determine whether or not to execute a zone announcement effect.

  The chance eye announcement effect presence / absence judgment table is as follows: (A) the big hit chance advance announcement effect presence / absence judgment table; (B) the super-reach out-of-reach chance eye announcement effect presence / absence judgment table; And a time chance notice announcement presence / absence determination table. The background change announcement effect presence / absence determination table includes a background change announcement presence / absence determination table at the time of a big hit, a background change announcement effect presence / absence determination table at the time of super-reach of (E), and a super-reach at (F). And a background change announcement effect presence / absence determination table. The hold change announcement effect presence / absence determination table includes (G) a jackpot hold change announcement notice presence / absence determination table, (H) a super-reach out-of-reach hold change announcement notice presence / absence determination table, and (I) a super-reach other than super reach. And a pending change announcement effect presence / absence determination table. The zone announcement effect presence / absence judgment table of (J), the zone announcement presence / absence judgment table of (K), the super-reach out-of-zone announcement effect presence / absence judgment table of (J), and the zone announcement effect of out-of-super-reach time of (L) And a presence / absence determination table. Each of these announcement effect presentation determination tables is stored in the ROM 102.

  (A) Big hit chance advance notice effect presence / absence judgment table, (D) Big hit background change advance notice effect presence / absence determination table, (G) Big hit hold change notice advance effect presence / absence judgment table, and (J) Big hit zone The notice presence / absence determination table is used at the time of a big hit prediction in which a variable display result of a variable display based on the hold storage information corresponding to the hold display is predicted to be a big hit display result.

  (B) Super-reach out-of-opportunity notice effect presentation presence / absence determination table, (E) Super-reach out-of-reach background change announcement effect presence / absence judgment table, (H) Super-reach out-of-reach hold change advance notice effect presence / absence determination table, The super reach out-of-reach time zone announcement effect presence / absence determination table of K) is used at the time of super-reach out-of-reach prediction in which a fluctuating display result of a fluctuating display based on on-hold storage information corresponding to a on-hold display is predicted to be a big hit display result.

  (C) Non-super-reach out-of-opportunity notice effect presentation presence / absence determination table, (F) Non-super-reach out-of-background change advance notice effect presence / absence determination table, (I) Non-super-reach out-of-office hold change announcement production presence / absence determination table , And (L) out-of-reach zone announcement effect presentation presence / absence determination table is used when the out-of-reach prediction other than the super reach in which the fluctuating display result of the fluctuating display based on the on-hold storage information corresponding to the on-hold display is predicted to be a big hit display result. Used.

  In the chance-announced-presentation-effect presence / absence determination tables of (A) to (C), a total of 100 numbers of random numbers SR2 (a numerical range of 0 to 99) for determining the presence / absence of a chance-eye announcement effect perform an announcement effect. The decision and the decision not to execute the notice effect are allocated. In each of the background change announcement effect presence / absence determination tables of (D) to (F), a total of 200 numerical values of the random number SR3 (value range from 0 to 199) for determining whether or not to execute the background change announcement effect execute the announcement effect. The decision and the decision not to execute the notice effect are allocated. In each of the (G) to (I) hold change notice effect presentation presence / absence determination tables, a total of 300 numbers of random numbers SR4 (numeric range of 0 to 299) for determining whether or not a hold change notice effect is executed execute a notice effect. The decision and the decision not to execute the notice effect are allocated. In the zone announcement effect presence / absence determination tables of (J) to (L), a total of 500 numerical values of the random number SR11 (a numerical range of 0 to 499) for determining whether or not the zone announcement effect is executed are determined by the decision to execute the announcement effect. , And a decision not to perform the notice production. For each of SR2 to SR4 and SR11, the number of allocated random numbers is shown for clarity of explanation.

  The predetermined timing is shown in each of the big hit chance chance notice effect presentation presence / absence judgment table, the big hit background change advance notice effect presence / absence judgment table of FIG. According to the value of SR2 extracted in step (2), the data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “execute the notice effect> do not execute the notice effect”. (B) Super-reach out-of-chance advance notice effect presence / absence determination table, (E) Super-reach out-of-reach background change advance notice presence / absence determination table, and (H) Super-reach out-of-reach hold change advance notice effect presence / absence determination table. In each case, the data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “execute a notice effect = do not execute a notice effect” based on the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing. (C) Non-super-reach out-of-opportunity notice announcement presence / absence judgment table, (F) Non-super-reach out-of-background change announcement / presence production presence / absence determination table, and (I) Non-super-reach out-of-office hold change announcement or non-presentation effect In each of the determination tables, data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “execute a notice effect <do not execute a notice effect” based on the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing.

  Also, comparing (A) to (C), (D) to (F), (G) to (I), and (J) to (L), the ratio of executing the prefetching effect at the time of determining the big hit is " The data is set so as to have a magnitude relationship of “chance eye announcement effect <background change announcement effect <pending change announcement effect <zone announcement effect”. In addition, data is set so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead effect at the time of a loss is in a magnitude relationship of “chance eye announcement effect> background change announcement effect> holding change announcement effect> zone announcement effect”. As a result, the degree of expectation for the jackpot when the effect is executed is increased in the magnitude relationship of “chance eye notice effect <background change notice effect <hold change notice effect <zone notice effect”). Note that the degree of expectation for the big hit when the pre-reading effect is executed may be set to another magnitude relationship such as the same for each of the notice effects.

  By setting the data in FIGS. 20A to 20L, when the variable display result of the variable display based on the hold storage information is the big hit display result, it is more likely than when the variable display result becomes the loss display result. For each of the advance notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the pending change notice effect, the ratio of execution to be determined increases. Thus, when such a prefetching effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the big hit can be increased as compared to when the prefetching effect is not executed. 20A to 20L, the variable display result of the variable display based on the hold storage information is an off-display result, but the super-reach with a high expectation of a big hit is a off-display result. In the case of, the change in the non-super-reach fluctuation display (for example, the normal reach fluctuation display, the normal fluctuation display, etc.) is lower than the super-reach when the expectation of the big hit becomes the super-reach. For each of the advance notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the pending change notice effect, the ratio of execution to be determined increases. Thus, when such a prefetching effect is executed, the degree of expectation of the player for the big hit can be increased as compared to when the prefetching effect is not executed.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a prefetching effect execution start change selection table. The look-ahead effect (other than the zone notice effect) execution start change selection table shown in FIG. 21 (A) executes a look-ahead effect other than the zone notice effect such as a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, and a hold change notice effect. When it is determined that the display is to be performed, the variable display for starting the execution of the look-ahead effect is selected and determined. FIG. 21B is used to select and determine the timing to start the execution of the zone announcement effect when it is determined that the zone announcement effect is to be executed as the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect execution start variation selection table is stored in the ROM 102.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (A), the look-ahead effect other than the zone announcement effect is executed on condition that at least two pieces of on-hold storage information including newly generated on-hold storage information are present. Since the upper limit number of the first reserved storage number is four, the variable display for starting the execution of the prefetch effect is based on the variable display based on the reserved storage information of the prefetch determination target, at the time of the preceding variable display, It can be executed from any one of the time of the change display two times before and the time of the change display three times before.

  In the look-ahead effect execution start variation selection table other than the zone announcement effect shown in FIG. 21 (A), the number of retained memories (first retained memory number) of the first special symbol including the newly generated suspended storage information is 2 to 2. For each of the four values, a total of 400 numerical values of random numbers SR5 (a numerical range of 0 to 399) for selecting a prefetch effect execution start variation are assigned at the time of the variation display one to three times before.

  In the look-ahead effect execution start variation selection table other than the zone announcement effect shown in FIG. 21 (A), the larger the number of first hold storages, the easier it is to start the execution of the look-ahead effect from the earlier variation display. Data is set. When it is determined to execute a look-ahead effect such as a chance eye announcement effect, a background change announcement effect, and a hold change announcement effect, a change that starts execution of the look-ahead effect using a look-ahead effect execution start change selection table. The display is selected and determined. As a result, the execution start timing of the look-ahead effect is no longer fixed, and the effect variations can be enriched.

  In the look-ahead effect (zone announcement effect) execution start variation selection table (zone announcement effect execution start variation selection table) shown in FIG. 21B, at the time of winning, at the time of the variation (reach established), and at the time of the variation (super reach development) Sometimes, a total of 400 random numbers SR5 (numerical range of 0 to 399) for prefetching effect execution start variation selection are assigned. Hereinafter, the zone announcement effect that starts at the time of winning is the first zone announcement effect, the zone announcement effect that starts at the time of the change (reach establishment) is the second zone announcement effect, and the zone announcement effect that starts at the time of the change (super reach development) is the first time. There is also a three-zone announcement production.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the look-ahead effect is executed only in the low base state, the look-ahead effect is executed targeting the first hold storage. Note that the pre-reading effect may be executed even in the high base state.

  As for the prefetch effect, as shown in FIG. 20, it is independently determined whether or not to execute each prefetch effect. On the other hand, after randomly determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, when it is determined to execute the look-ahead effect, a chance eye notice effect, a background change notice effect, a hold change notice effect, and From the zone announcement effects, any one of the announcement effects or any of a plurality of types of announcement effects may be selected, and the selected effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect. Further, regarding the pre-reading effect, the zone notice effect and the pre-reading effect other than the zone notice effect may be separately distinguished, and it may be independently determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect other than the zone notice effect and the zone notice effect. . Here, when it is determined to execute a look-ahead effect other than the zone notice effect, any one of the chance effect notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the pending change notice effect, or one of the notice effects, May be selected, and the selected effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing the effect control data holding area, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the start winning reception command buffer + effect buffer, and FIG. 24 is an explanation showing the start winning reception command buffer data designation contents. FIG. The RAM 103 mounted on the effect control board 80 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 22, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 22 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  The effect control flag setting section 191 includes a plurality of effect update operation states such as a display state of an effect image on the screen of the effect display device 9 and a plurality of states whose states can be updated according to an effect control command transmitted from the main board 31. Type flags are provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the effect display device 9. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting section 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations, such as SR1-1 to SR5 and SR11 described above. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In this embodiment, data forming the start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer as shown in FIG. 23 are stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As shown in FIG. 23, a start winning reception command buffer and an effect buffer are provided in two types, one for a first special symbol and one for a second special symbol. FIG. 23 shows, as an example, a start winning reception command buffer and an effect buffer corresponding to a first special symbol for executing a prefetch effect. The start winning reception command buffer for the first special symbol corresponds to the columns of symbol designation, variation type, start winning designation, and the number of retained storages in the buffer shown in FIG. This is a storage buffer for receiving a received command when it occurs. In the start winning reception command buffer, a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (for example, “4”) is provided. In such a start receiving prize receiving command buffer, the presence / absence of the prefetching effect (other than the zone notice effect) shown in FIG. 23, the change in execution of the prefetch effect (other than the zone notice effect), the designation of the chance notice notice effect mode, the background change An effect buffer including a storage area corresponding to the fields of advance announcement effect mode designation, hold change announcement effect mode designation, zone announcement effect determination presence / absence, zone announcement effect execution change designation, and zone advance effect condition designation is stored in each hold memory. It is added in an associated manner. The start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer may be individually provided in different areas in the RAM 103.

  The start winning reception command buffer includes an area for storing a symbol designation command (“symbol designation” in the figure) and an area for storing a variation type command (“variation type” in the figure) as an area for storing a command received at the time of a startup winning. )), An area for storing a start prize specification command (first start prize specification command) (in the figure, “start prize specification”), and an area for storing a reserved storage number designation command (first reserved storage number designation command) ( In the figure, “designation of the number of reserved storages”) is provided.

  When there is a start winning in the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation type command, a start winning designation command (first or second start winning designation command), and a hold storage. A command called a number designation command (first or second reserved storage number designation command) is transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 stores data specifying commands in the order received at the time of the start winning, from the beginning of the free area of the receiving command buffer at the time of the start winning. As a result, when there is a start winning, the received command is stored in each area of "designation of symbol", "variation type", "designation of starting winning", and "designation of number of retained memory" in the figure. .

  The various data stored in the start winning reception command buffer and the corresponding effect buffer shown in FIG. 23 are stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the buffer number “1”) every time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Is read out for use in producing a variable display, and then deleted, and the subsequent storage contents are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 23, when the variation display of the effect symbol starts next, each data stored in the buffer number “1” is read out and deleted, and the data corresponding to the buffer number “2” is deleted. Each data stored in the area that has been shifted is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”.

  The effect buffer shown in FIG. 23 may be provided with a storage area in correspondence with an address connected (subordinated) to the start winning reception command buffer, and a storage area of an address independent of the start winning reception command buffer. In addition, a storage area may be provided corresponding to each start winning storage.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the area of the “designation” command, “C200 (H)” indicates designation of a loss display result, and “C201 (H)” indicates designation of a big hit display result. In the area of the “variation type” command, “C300 (H)” indicates the type of normal variation, “C301 (H)” indicates the type of normal reach variation, and “C302 (H)” indicates the type of super reach variation. Show. In the area of the “start winning prize specification” command, “A401 (H)” indicates the first start prize specification, and “A402 (H)” indicates the second start prize specification. In the area of “designation of the number of reserved storages”, “C001 (H)” to “C004 (H)” indicate the first reserved storage numbers “0” to “4”, and “C101 (H)” to “C104 ( H) "indicates the second reserved storage numbers" 0 "to" 4 ".

  The free area in the start winning reception command buffer, that is, the data in the area where no data is stored is “0000 (H)”. At the time of the start winning, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designating command, the variation type command, the start winning designating command (first and second), and the number of retained storage designation command (first and second). Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 20B, the symbol designation command, the variation type command, the start winning designation, and the like are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4". A command and a command for specifying the number of pending storages are stored. FIG. 20B shows an example in which commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores the following information for effect corresponding to the data of the buffer numbers “1” to “4” in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning for the first special symbol. Effect buffer is provided as a storage area. For the second special symbol, in this embodiment, a prefetch effect is not executed, and therefore, an effect buffer for executing the prefetch effect is not provided. Note that, for the second special symbol, an effect buffer for executing the prefetch effect may be provided, and the prefetch effect may be executed similarly to the first special symbol.

  Regarding the first special symbol, in the prefetching effect process described later, the prefetching effect (zone notice) is performed by the effect controlling microcomputer 100 based on predetermined data such as the symbol designating information stored in the start winning reception command buffer. Data of “Presentation presence / absence determination”, “Prefetching performance (other than zone announcement production) execution variation designation” data, “Chance eye announcement production mode designation” data, “Background change advance announcement production mode designation” data, “Hold change The data of "Presentation effect mode designation", the data of "Presence / absence of zone notice effect determination", and the data of "Zone notice effect execution change designation" are buffer numbers "1" corresponding to the hold storage information in the start winning reception command buffer. "Pre-reading effect (other than zone announcement effect)" provided in the effect buffer corresponding to each data of ~ "4" Data storage area for "presence / absence", data storage area for "prefetch effect (other than zone announcement effect) execution variation designation", data storage region for "chance eye announcement effect mode designation", data storage for "background change announcement effect aspect designation" The area is stored in the data storage area of “designation of pending change announcement production mode” and the data storage area of “presence or absence of zone announcement production determination”.

  The data of “predetermined presence / absence effect (other than zone notice effect) determination” is data indicating whether or not a prefetch effect other than the zone notice effect has been determined (presence / absence). The data of "designation of execution change of pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect)" is data indicating whether or not designated (determined) as a fluctuation display when executing a look-ahead effect other than zone notice effect. The data of “designation of a chance eye announcement effect mode” is data indicating whether or not a chance eye announcement effect is to be executed and an effect mode. The data of “designation of the background change announcement effect mode” is data indicating whether or not the background change announcement effect is to be executed and the effect mode. The data of “designation of a pending change announcement effect mode” is data indicating whether or not a pending change announcement effect is to be executed and an effect mode.

  When the execution determination of the look-ahead effect based on the various notice effect presence / absence determination tables in FIGS. 20A to 20I is not yet performed for the look-ahead determination target as the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning, the “look-ahead effect” (Other than zone announcement effect) In the data storage area of “presence / absence”, data of “1000 (H)” that can specify “non-judgment” is stored, and when it is determined whether or not to execute a prefetch effect, Data of “1001 (H)” that can specify “determined” is stored in the storage area of “pre-reading effect (other than zone announcement effect) determination”.

  When it is determined that at least one of a chance eye announcement effect, a background change announcement effect, and a hold change announcement effect is to be executed for the look-ahead determination target as the hold memory information corresponding to the new start winning. In accordance with the content of the effect, in the data storage area of “prefetching effect (other than zone announcement effect) execution variation designation” corresponding to the hold storage information before the prefetching determination target, “prefetch effect (other than zone announcement effect) execution variation designation Is stored as “2001 (H)”. On the other hand, when it is determined that none of the announcement effects is to be executed, “2000 (H)” that can specify “no effect” is stored in the storage area of the data of “prefetch effect execution variation designation” corresponding to the prefetch determination target. Is stored.

  When it is determined from the determination tables in FIGS. 20A to 20C that the advance notice effect is not to be executed for the look-ahead determination target as the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning, the “advance notice effect production” “3000 (H)” data that can specify “no effect” is stored in the data storage area of “designation of mode”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance-announcement effect is to be executed, how many times before the fluctuation display is executed, the number-of-times-advance-effect announcement effect is executed using the chance-eye-announcement-effect execution start variation selection table in FIG. Is determined, and any kind of chance-announcement effect pattern is selected and determined using the above-mentioned chance-announcement effect mode selection table.

  Then, in the data storage area of “designation of a chance eye advance presentation mode” corresponding to the hold storage information before the hold storage information to be pre-read, the chance eye advance presentation effect is executed in order to execute the determined chance advance announcement effect pattern. Data (3001 (H) to etc.) that can specify a pattern is stored. In FIG. 23, the pending storage information of the buffer number 4 is the target of the prefetch determination, and it is determined that the chance eye announcement effect is to be performed on the target of the prefetch determination. An example in which data of the first chance announcement effect pattern is set in the data storage area of FIG.

  When it is determined from the determination tables of FIGS. 20 (D) to (F) that the background change announcement effect is not to be executed for the look-ahead determination target as the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning, the "background change announcement effect" “3000 (H)” data that can specify “no effect” is stored in the data storage area of “designation of mode”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the background change announcement effect is to be executed, the background change announcement effect is executed from how many times before the change is displayed using the look-ahead effect execution start variation selection table of FIG. Is determined, and any type of background change notice effect pattern is selected and determined using the above-described background change notice effect mode selection table.

  Then, in the data storage area of “designation of background change announcement effect mode” corresponding to the hold information before the hold information of the prefetch determination target, the background change announcement effect is executed in order to execute the determined background change announcement effect pattern. Data (3101 (H) to etc.) that can specify a pattern is stored. In FIG. 23, the pending storage information of the buffer number 4 is a prefetch determination target, and it is determined that the background change announcement effect is to be performed for the prefetch determination object. An example in which the data of the first background change announcement effect pattern is set in the data storage area of FIG.

  When it is determined from the determination tables of FIGS. 20 (G) to (I) that the hold change announcement effect is not to be executed for the look-ahead determination target as the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning, the “hold change announcement effect” “3000 (H)” data that can specify “no effect” is stored in the data storage area of “designation of mode”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending change announcement effect is to be executed, the pending change announcement effect is executed from the number of times before the variation display using the look-ahead effect execution start variation selection table of FIG. Is determined, and further, using the above-described hold change notice effect mode selection table, any kind of hold change notice effect pattern is selected and determined.

  Then, in the data storage area of “designation of the hold change announcement effect mode” corresponding to the hold memory information before the hold memory information of the prefetch determination target, in order to execute the determined hold change announcement effect pattern, Data that can specify a pattern (3201 (H) to etc.) is stored. In FIG. 23, the pending storage information of the buffer number 4 is the target of the prefetch determination, and it is determined that the pending change announcement effect is not to be executed for the target of the prefetch determination. In the data storage area, an example is shown in which no effect data is set.

  In the data storage area of “specify prefetch effect (other than zone notice effect) execution change designation” corresponding to each hold storage information, execute any of the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect. When it is determined that “prefetching effect execution variation designation is specified”, “2001H” that can specify “prefetching effect execution variation designation is stored” is stored. Is stored.

  When it is determined from the determination tables in FIGS. 20 (J) to (L) that the zone announcement effect is not to be executed for the look-ahead determination target as the hold storage information corresponding to the new start winning, the “zone announcement effect mode designation Is stored in the data storage area of “4200 (H)” that can specify “no effect”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the zone announcement effect is to be executed, any one of the first zone announcement effect to the third zone announcement effect is executed using the zone announcement effect execution start variation selection table of FIG. Is determined, and any type of zone announcement effect pattern is selected and determined using the above-described zone announcement effect mode selection table.

  Then, in the data storage area of “designation of zone notice effect mode” corresponding to the hold information before the hold information targeted for the prefetch determination, the zone notice effect pattern is specified in order to execute the determined zone notice effect pattern. Possible data (4201 (H)) is stored. In FIG. 23, the information stored in the reserved zone announcement effect mode selection table of the buffer number 4 is the target for the prefetch determination, and it is determined that the zone announcement effect is not to be executed for the target for the prefetch determination. In the data storage area of “design of effect mode”, an example in which data of no effect is set is shown.

  In this way, in the effect buffer, “pre-reading effect (other than zone notice effect) determination”, “pre-fetch effect (other than zone notice effect) execution change designation”, “chance eye notice effect mode designation”, “background change notice effect” The above-described data is stored in the respective data storage areas of “designation of mode”, “designation of a pending change announcement effect”, “presence or absence of zone announcement effect determination”, and “designation of zone announcement effect execution variation”. The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a look-ahead effect such as a chance notice effect, a background change notice effect, a hold change notice effect, and a zone notice effect based on checking such data. Becomes possible.

  FIG. 25 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading notification. Since the pre-reading notification is not performed, the relationship between the pre-reading effect other than the zone notice effect and the pre-reading notification will be described here. In FIG. 25, (A1), (B1), (C1), and (D1) show the relationship between the prefetch effect and the prefetching notification before the fluctuation display of the prefetch determination target. In FIG. 25, (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2) show a first example of the relationship between the prefetching effect and the prefetching notification in the variable display after the prefetching determination target. In FIG. 25, (A3), (B3), (C3), and (D3) show a second example of the relationship between the prefetching effect and the prefetching notification in the variable display after the prefetching determination target.

  As shown in (A1) to (D1), before the fluctuation display of the prefetch determination target, a chance eye announcement production is executed as a prefetch effect based on the prefetch determination target from the time of the fluctuation display three times before the prefetch determination target. Is started, and when it is determined that the execution of the background change notice effect is started at the time of the change display three times before the prefetch determination target, a plurality of types of look-ahead effects are executed as follows.

  As shown in (C1), the execution of the background notice effect is started at the same time as the start of the variable display three times before the prefetch determination target. Since this point is at the start of the variable display, the chance eye announcement effect is not executed. As described above, when a plurality of types of pre-reading effects are executed in response to one change display, as shown in (D1), the pre-reading effect is started at the start of the pre-reading effect by the background notice effect that is started first. The execution of the notification is started. As shown in (B1), the chance eye announcement effect is executed at the time of deriving and displaying the display result immediately before the end of the respective variable display three times before, the second time, and the one time before the prefetch determination target.

  As described above, when a plurality of types of prefetching effects are executed in response to one change display, the execution of the prefetching notification is started at the start of the prefetching effect by the background notice effect that is started first. Therefore, the execution time of the pre-reading notification when a plurality of specific effects are executed can be set to an appropriate time.

  Further, when the specific effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays as shown in (B1) and (C1), the pre-reading notification can be executed over a plurality of variable displays as shown in (D1). Thus, the pre-reading notification can be executed in accordance with the execution time of the pre-reading effect, and the recognizability of the pre-reading effect can be further improved.

  Next, state control of pre-reading notification during variable display after the pre-read determination target will be described. When there is no pending storage information for which execution of the next prefetch effect is to be performed when the variable display of the prefetch determination target is executed, (A2), (B2), (C2), and (D2) are shown. In this way, the background notice effect ends as shown in (C2) in response to the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target. At this time, the pre-reading notification is continued even after the variable display of the pre-read determination target ends, and is terminated when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the variable display one time after the variable display of the pre-read determination target.

  Regarding the pre-reading notification, as shown in (D2), the pre-reading notification is ended not after the end of the fluctuation display of the pre-read determination target but after the end, so that the fluctuation display of the pre-read judgment target when the pre-reading effect is executed is displayed. It becomes impossible for the player to easily identify which variation display the variation display is, and it is possible to make it difficult for the variation display of the prefetch determination target to be identified by the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, when a look-ahead effect is performed as a specific effect, in particular, a fluctuation display that results in a deviation display without reaching reach, and a fluctuation display that results in a deviation display after reaching normal reach. When the hold storage information in which the fluctuation display with a relatively low expectation for the big hit is executed is the prefetch determination target (target), the prefetch effect is performed at the time when the fluctuation display of the prefetch determination target is executed and ended. When the processing is completed, the player can easily recognize the variable display of the pre-read determination target, so that there is a problem that the player has an awkward feeling and the interest of the game decreases. On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the pre-reading notification is ended not after the end of the variable display of the pre-read determination target but after the end, so that the pre-reading effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing which variation display is the variation display of the prefetch determination target (recognition of the prefetch determination target can be reduced). Thus, in this embodiment, it is possible to alleviate the player having the above-mentioned amusement feeling in the pre-reading effect, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, when the variable display of the prefetch determination target is executed, if there is the pending storage information for which execution of the next prefetch effect is determined, (A3), (B3), (C3), (D3) As shown in the figure, the pre-reading notification continues even when the pre-read determination target variable display ends, and the fluctuation after one time after the pre-read determination target fluctuation display is performed, as in the case where there is no pending storage information. Even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the display, the display is not terminated, and is continuously executed until the variable display corresponding to the prefetch determination target for which the next prefetch effect is determined to be executed is executed. .

  In this way, the pre-reading notification is continued during the period from the end of the variable display of the first pre-read determination target to the start of the next variable display of the second pre-read determination target when there are a plurality of pre-read determination targets. In this manner, the notification is executed, so that even after the end of the preceding variable display of the prefetch determination target, the player has an impression that the prefetch notice effect is continuously executed until the next variable display of the prefetch determination target is performed. , And it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the game between a plurality of variable displays of prefetch determination targets.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the prefetching effect process (S700) described above. In the pre-reading effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following processing.

  First, the contents of the first winning storage shown in FIG. 22 in the start winning reception command buffer and the effect buffer are checked, and among them, it is not determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect. It is determined whether or not there is (S711). For example, in the storage area for the presence / absence of the pre-reading effect (other than the zone announcement effect), there is data in the hold storage in which the data of “1000 (H)” is stored, or in the area for the presence or absence of the zone announcement effect determination, “4100 (H)”. )) Is stored.

  If it is determined in step S711 that there is no undetermined first hold storage in which the determination as to whether to execute the prefetch effect is made, the process ends. On the other hand, in S711, if there is a first pending storage for which the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect has not been determined, it is determined whether or not the current number of first pending storages is 2 or more. Confirmation is performed based on the first reserved storage number specified by the designated command (S712). In S712, when the first hold storage number is less than 2, there is no first hold storage information for performing the variable display before performing the variable display based on the new first hold storage information, and a new first hold is performed. Since there is no variable display of the target for which the prefetch effect based on the stored information is executed, it is confirmed whether the variable display for executing the prefetch effect is executable.

  If the current first reserved storage number is not 2 or more in S712, it is determined that the prefetch effect is not to be executed (S727), and the process proceeds to S728 described later. On the other hand, if the current number of first hold storages is 2 or more in S712, the corresponding change display result and change type are checked in the start winning winning reception command buffer for the hold storage information to be prefetched (S713). . Then, based on the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation type confirmed in S713, the corresponding table is selected from the chance eye announcement effect presentation presence / absence determination tables of FIGS. 20A to 20C, and the random number SR3 is extracted and selected. Using the table, based on the extracted value of the random number SR3, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance notice effect (S717).

  Next, based on the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation type confirmed in S713, a corresponding table is selected from the background change announcement effect presence / absence determination tables of FIGS. 20 (D) to (F), and a random number SR4 is extracted and selected. It is determined whether or not to execute the background change announcement effect based on the extracted value of the random number SR4 using the table thus obtained (S718).

  Next, based on the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation type confirmed in S713, a corresponding table is selected from the pending change announcement effect presence / absence determination tables of FIGS. 20 (G) to (I), and a random number SR5 is extracted and selected. Using the extracted table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pending change announcement effect based on the extracted value of the random number SR5 (S719).

  Then, when it is determined that the hold change announcement effect is to be executed, the data of “determined” is stored as the data of the storage area of “presence or absence of change effect determination presence / absence” of the first hold storage information of the prefetch determination target ( S720). If it is determined not to execute the pending change announcement effect, the data of “no judgment” is stored as the data of the storage area of “presence or absence of change effect such as holding”.

  Next, based on the determination results in S717 to S719, it is determined whether or not it is determined to execute any of the prefetching effects corresponding to the prefetching determination target (S721). If it is determined in S721 that none of the prefetching effects is to be executed, the “specified” is stored as the “prefetching effect (other than zone announcement effect) execution change designation” corresponding to the first hold storage information to be prefetched. “No” is stored, and “production” is stored as data for specifying various preview production modes, such as “chance eye announcement production mode designation”, “background change announcement production mode designation”, and “hold change announcement production mode designation”. "No" data is stored (S726). Subsequently, a zone announcement effect process is performed (S726A). The zone announcement effect processing will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to S728.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S721 that one of the prefetch effects is to be executed, the variable display result of the pending storage information of the prefetch determination target is confirmed in the start winning reception command buffer (S722).

  Then, for one or a plurality of pre-reading effects for which the pre-reading effect is determined to be executed among the chance eye pre-production effect, the background change pre-production effect, and the pending change pre-production effect, the pre-fetch production execution start variation selection table of FIG. While selecting and extracting the random number SR5, using the selected table, based on the extracted value of the random number SR5, the variable display times for starting the execution of the look-ahead effect to be executed is from one time before to three times from the pre-read determination target. The selection is determined from before (S723).

  Next, for one or a plurality of pre-reading effects for which the pre-reading effect has been determined to be executed among the chance eye pre-production effect, the background change pre-production effect, and the hold change pre-production effect, The selection is determined for each type of effect (S724).

  In S724, specifically, when it is determined to execute the chance eye announcement presentation effect, the random number SR6 for selecting the chance eye announcement presentation effect mode is extracted, and the chance eye announcement effect presentation mode selection table is selected, and the random number SR6 is extracted. Based on the value, a chance eye announcement effect pattern as a chance eye announcement effect mode is selected and determined from a plurality of chance eye announcement effect patterns. In S724, when it is determined that the background change announcement effect is to be executed, a random number SR7 for selecting the background change announcement effect mode is selected, and the background change announcement effect mode selection table is selected. , A background change announcement effect pattern as a background change announcement effect mode is selected and determined from a plurality of background change announcement effect patterns. Further, in S724, when it is determined that the hold change announcement effect is to be executed, a random number SR8 for selecting the hold change advance effect mode is selected, and the hold change advance effect mode is selected, and the random number SR8 is selected. Based on the extracted value of, the change in advance notice effect pattern as the change in advance notice effect mode is selected and determined from a plurality of change in advance notice effect patterns.

  Next, in accordance with the start time and the effect form of the look-ahead effect determined in S723 and S724, “specify a pre-reading effect (other than a zone notice effect) execution variation designation”, “designate a chance eye notice effect condition mode”, and “background change notice” The data is stored in a data storage area with various announcement effect target designations such as “effect stage designation” and “hold change announcement effect stage designation” (S725), and the process proceeds to S728.

  Specifically, in S725, as described above, in the data storage area before the target of the pre-reading determination, the data storage of the "chance eye advance presentation mode designation" for the variable number of display times determined in S723, as described above. In the area, the data of the look-ahead effect form that specifies the chance notice effect pattern determined in S724 is stored. In step S725, as described above, the background change notice effect is stored in the data storage area of the “background change notice effect mode designation” for the variable display count determined in step S723 in the data storage area before the prefetch determination target. The data of the look-ahead effect form for specifying the background change notice effect pattern determined in step (1) is stored. In S725, as described above, the pending change announcement effect is stored in the data storage area of the “designation of suspension change announcement effect mode” for the variable display count determined in S723 in the data storage area before the prefetch determination target, as described above. The data of the look-ahead effect mode for specifying the pending change announcement effect pattern determined in step (1) is stored.

  In S728, a random number SR8 for holding display appearance color selection determination is extracted, and a hold display appearance color selection determination random number is determined based on the extracted value of the random number SR8 using a predetermined data table for holding display appearance color selection determination. The data table has a selection ratio of a magnitude relationship of “normal color (yellow) <white <blue <green <red” when a big hit display result is obtained, and “normal color (yellow)> white” when a loss display result is obtained. The data is set so that the selection ratio of the magnitude relation of “> blue> green> red” is obtained.

  Next, with respect to the first hold storage information to be prefetched, a display is performed in which the hold image of the appearance hold color selected and determined in S727 appears as a new hold image (S729), and the process ends. In this way, in the pre-reading effect processing, when new hold storage information is generated in response to a new starting prize, the appearance hold color is selected and determined as the appearance hold display mode, and the appearance hold color is newly determined in the determined appearance hold display mode. Is executed to cause the reserved image to appear. The suspended image displayed in this manner is subjected to the pending shift operation by the pending storage display control process of S707 in FIG. 13 every time the variable display is executed, and the display position is shifted (moved).

  It should be noted that, as described above, the processing for selecting and determining the appearance suspension display mode (appearance suspension color) when new suspension storage information is generated according to a new start winning prize is described in the suspension storage display in S707 in FIG. When the suspension storage display control process is executed, the appearance suspension display mode may be selected and determined.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the above-described zone announcement effect processing (S726A). In the zone announcement effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following processing.

  First, based on the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation type confirmed in S713, a corresponding table is selected from the zone announcement effect presence / absence determination tables of FIGS. 20 (J) to (L), a random number SR11 is extracted, and the selected table is extracted. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the zone announcement effect based on the extracted value of the random number SR11 (S751). When it is determined that the zone announcement effect is to be executed, the data of “determined” is stored as the data of the storage area of “presence of zone announcement effect determination” for the first hold storage information to be pre-read (S752). . When it is determined that the zone announcement effect is not to be executed, the data of “no judgment” is stored as the data of the storage area of “zone announcement effect determination”.

  Next, based on the determination result in S751, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the zone announcement effect corresponding to the prefetch determination target (S753). When it is determined in S753 that the zone announcement effect is not to be executed (NO in S753), the storage data of “zone announcement effect execution change designation” is stored as “storage announcement effect execution change designation” corresponding to the first hold storage information to be prefetched. The data of "No effect" is stored, and the data of "No effect" is stored as the storage data of "Zone announcement effect mode designation" (S754).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S753 that the zone announcement effect is to be executed (YES in S753), the result of the variable display of the pending storage information to be prefetched is checked in the start winning reception command buffer. Next, the effect of the zone announcement effect to be executed is selected and determined for each type of prefetch effect (S755). Subsequently, while extracting the random number SR5, using the zone announcement effect execution start selection table shown in FIG. 21 (B), the zone announcement effect to be executed is the first zone announcement effect based on the extracted value of the random number SR5. It is determined whether or not it is (S756).

  If the zone announcement effect to be executed is the first zone announcement effect in S756 (YES in S756), a shutter image is displayed (S757), and the zone announcement effect process ends. When displaying the shutter image, a zone-only or non-zone-only character is displayed in front of the shutter image. If the zone announcement effect to be executed is not the first zone announcement effect (NO in S756), the zone announcement effect process is terminated.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start processing, it is confirmed whether or not the variation display result is determined to be out (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out is determined, for example, by whether or not the display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out, it is confirmed whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received as the variation pattern command (S602). Whether or not a command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received is determined, for example, by data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the display result of the non-reachable loss is determined as the final stop of the effect symbol using the loss symbol determination data table stored in the ROM 102 (S604). , S616A. In the lost symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the extracted numerical data is respectively set to the left and the middle using a lost symbol determination data table. , Is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in a variation display of the effect symbol on the right. In the case of determining the combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols in this way, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number coincides with the combination of the big hit symbols, correction is made to be a combination of out-of-reach symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by one symbol). When the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number becomes a reach symbol by accident, the stop symbol is corrected so as to be a combination of non-reach out-of-reach symbols (for example, the right symbol is shifted by one symbol) and each stop symbol is corrected. Is determined.

  If it is determined in the processing of S602 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that the pattern is the reach variation pattern), the stop symbols of the effect symbols constituting the combination of the reach symbols are determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616A. In the process of S605, numerical data (random number) is extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the random number extracted from SR1-1 is extracted using a lost symbol determination data table. A symbol corresponding to a random number matching the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 is determined as a stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state, and is determined as a middle symbol. Also, in this case, if a combination of the big hits happens to occur, each stop symbol is determined by correcting the combination of the symbols (for example, correcting the middle symbol by shifting one symbol).

  In addition, when it is not determined to be a deviation in the process of S601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N of S601), the effect control CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop symbol of the effect symbol constituting the combination is determined (S603), and the process proceeds to S616A.

  In S603, the combination of winning symbols is determined according to the type of big hit as follows. Based on which display result designation command of the display result 2 designation command and the display result 3 designation command is stored in the display result identification command storage area, the type of the jackpot from the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. When it is determined that it is determined to be a jackpot, a numerical data (random number) is extracted from the SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of the SR1-1 and the jackpot symbol (for example, left, Using the data table (table for determining the variable jackpot symbol determination) in which the relationship with the middle and right is set to the odd-numbered slot combination such as “7, 7, 7” etc. Is determined. Also, when it is determined that the normal jackpot has been determined, numerical data (random number) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and the normal jackpot symbol (for example, left, middle, Using a data table (normal jackpot symbol determination table) in which the relationship with the right-hand slot combination such as “4, 4, 4” is set on the right, the combination of any of the ordinary jackpot symbols from the extracted values Select and decide. The symbol determined in this manner is used as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, a process for setting various effects in the variable display (for example, the effect of the variable display of the effect symbol (including the variable display mode such as the pseudo-run), the effect of the change such as the hold, and the various effects such as the specific notice effect After performing the effect setting process A (S616A) and the effect setting process B (S616B) for performing the effect setting process, the process proceeds to S617. The processing contents of the effect setting process A and the effect setting process B will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control is performed in accordance with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command and various effect control (effect operations) patterns specified by the effect control patterns of the effects determined in the processing of S616A and S616B. Any of the plurality of design variation control patterns stored in the pattern table is selected and determined as one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the specified various effect operation patterns.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect in the display area of the effect display device 9 during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the effect symbol to the stop display of the final effect symbol as the final stop symbol. There are multiple types of symbol variation control patterns as the data indicating the control contents of various rendering operations such as symbol variation display operation, production display operation in reach production, production display operation in pseudo-rendition production, and production display operation in preview production. Is stored.

  In addition, each symbol variation control pattern, for example, effect control process timer set value, effect control process timer determination value, effect display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, and the end code, such as a variation display of the effect symbol It includes control data for controlling various kinds of effecting operations in accordance with the content of the effect control and the timing of switching the effect control, etc., in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  After performing the process of S619, the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect display device 9 as the effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is started (S620). For example, an instruction is output to the VDP 109 in accordance with the display control execution data to cause the effect display device 9 to display an image (including effect symbols) in accordance with the variation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of the light emitting body such as various LEDs. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speaker 27.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect design variation process (S802). A symbol change start process is executed (S622). Then, the effect symbol variation start process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the above-described effect setting processing A (S616A). In the effect setting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display in which the execution of the prefetch active change effect (active change effect) is specified (S781). Specifically, in S780, in the effect buffer for the first hold storage shown in FIG. 23, “zone notice effect execution change designation” corresponding to the hold information for executing the present fluctuation display is “zone notice effect change designation”. When the data of “execution variation is specified” is stored, it is determined that the variation display has been designated to execute the zone announcement effect. In S781, when it is determined that the display is not the variable display in which the execution of the zone announcement effect is specified (NO in S781), the effect setting process ends.

  If it is determined in S781 that the variation display has been designated to execute the pre-reading effect (YES in S781), the current variation display is executed in the effect buffer for the first suspension storage shown in FIG. Based on the confirmation of the data of "zone announcement effect mode designation" corresponding to the stored information, the effect mode of the zone announcement effect to be executed this time is confirmed (S782). For example, when the zone announcement effect mode “4201” is stored, the “zone announcement effect execution pattern” is confirmed as the effect mode of the zone announcement effect.

  Next, based on the confirmation result of the production mode of the zone announcement effect to be executed in the current fluctuation display in S782, the effect pattern of the zone announcement effect to be executed and the execution timing are set (S783). Specifically, in S783, for example, in the present fluctuation display, which type of zone announcement effect is to be executed in which effect pattern and at what timing in accordance with the confirmed “zone announcement effect mode designation” data. Set the effect pattern of the zone notice effect like that. The execution timing of the zone announcement effect to be executed is determined using the zone announcement effect execution start variation selection table in FIG. 21 (AB), and the effect start for each zone announcement effect type set in the zone announcement effect type table in FIG. It is possible to determine and set based on referring to the time.

  Subsequently, the effect pattern after the shutter is opened is determined (S784). As shown in FIG. 31, as the effect patterns after the shutter is opened, “effect pattern 1 (with no NR accessory operation)”, “effect pattern 2 (with NR accessory operation)”, “effect pattern 3 (for SR) "No effect action"), "Effect pattern 4 (SR action action available)", "Effect pattern 5 (SR action action available)", "Effect pattern 6 (NR action action twice)" There are six patterns.

  The “casing action” indicated by the effect pattern after the shutter is opened refers to an operation in which the movable effecting member (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an effecting object) 60 tilts and the upper part of the effecting object swings (hereinafter, referred to as “operation effect”). (Also referred to as a tilting motion). In FIG. 31, “for NR” means for normal reach, “for SR” means for super reach, and “gear” means for staging fortune 60. The super reach is a reach developed after the normal reach and developed from the normal reach.

The “effect pattern 1 (no NR accessory operation)” illustrated in FIG. 31 is an effect pattern in which normal reach without the tilting operation of the effect accessory 60 is executed.
The “effect pattern 2 (with NR role operation)” is an effect pattern in which a tilt operation of the direction effect feature 60 is performed before the normal reach, and the normal reach is executed.
The “effect pattern 3 (without SR action)” is an effect pattern in which a super-reach without the tilting action of the effect accessory 60 is executed.
The “effect pattern 4 (with SR accessory operation)” is an effect pattern in which there is a tilting operation of the effect accessory 60 before the normal reach, and the super reach is executed.
The “effect pattern 5 (with SR accessory operation)” is an effect pattern in which the staging operation of the effect accessory 60 is performed after developing into super reach.
“Effect pattern 6 (with NR action twice)” is an effect pattern in which the double effect actor performs a tilting operation before normal reach and after developing into super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (A), when the normal reach at the time of the loss is executed, “effect pattern 1 (no NR accessory operation)” is executed at a rate of 98%, and “effect pattern 2” is executed at a rate of 2%. (With NR accessory operation) ”, a total of 100 numerical values of the effect pattern determining random numbers SR21 after opening the shutter (a numerical range of 0 to 100) are allocated.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (B), when super-reach at the time of loss is executed, “effect pattern 3 (no SR action is performed)” is executed at a rate of 60%, and “effect pattern 3” is executed at a rate of 20%. 4 (with SR operation), "Radio pattern 5 (with SR operation)" is executed at a rate of 15%, and "Radio pattern 6 (with NR action)" at a rate of 5%. 100 times of the random number SR21 for effect pattern determination after shutter release (numerical value range of 0 to 100) is allocated so that “2 operations”) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (C), when the normal hit at the time of the big hit is executed, “the effect pattern 1 (no NR accessory operation)” is executed at a rate of 40%, and the “effect pattern 2” at a rate of 60%. (With NR accessory operation) ”, a total of 100 numerical values of the effect pattern determining random numbers SR21 after opening the shutter (a numerical range of 0 to 100) are allocated.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (D), when super-reach at the time of loss is performed, “rendering pattern 3 (no SR action)” is performed at a rate of 20%, and “rendering pattern 3” is performed at a rate of 30%. 4 (with SR operation), "Radio pattern 5 (with SR operation)" is executed at a rate of 20%, and "Radio pattern 6 (with NR action)" at a rate of 30%. 100 times of the random number SR21 for effect pattern determination after shutter release (numerical value range of 0 to 100) is allocated so that “2 operations”) is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (D), the effect patterns after the shutter is opened are “effect pattern 1 <effect pattern 2”, “effect pattern 3 <effect pattern 4 <effect pattern 5” when the big hit display result is obtained. The selection ratio of the magnitude relation of <production pattern 6> is obtained, and when the result of the out-of-order display is obtained, the magnitude relation of “production pattern 1> production pattern 2”, “production pattern 3> production pattern 4> production pattern 5> production pattern 6” is obtained. The data is set so that the selection ratio becomes.

  In addition, the BGM is changed according to each effect pattern. The relationship between each effect pattern and the content of the BGM will be described later. Thus, the effect setting process A ends.

  Next, the effect setting process B will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the above-described effect setting processing B (S616B). In the effect setting process, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the following process.

  First, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation display is a fluctuation display in which the execution of the prefetch active change effect is specified (S630). Specifically, in S630, in the effect buffer for the first hold storage shown in FIG. 20 (B), "pre-reading effect (other than zone announcement effect) execution change designation corresponding to the hold storage information for executing the current change display. When the data of "prefetched effect execution variation is specified" is stored as the data of "", it is determined that the variation display has been designated to execute the prefetching effect. In S630, when it is determined that the display is not the variable display in which the execution of the prefetch effect is specified (N in S630), the process proceeds to S637 described later.

  When it is determined in S630 that the display is a variable display in which the execution of the pre-reading effect has been specified (Y in S630), a hold for executing the current variable display in the effect buffer for the first hold storage shown in FIG. The look-ahead effect to be executed this time based on confirming the respective data of “chance eye announcement effect mode designation”, “background change announcement effect mode designation”, and “pending change announcement effect mode designation” corresponding to the stored information. Is confirmed (S631).

  Next, based on the result of the confirmation of the effect of the look-ahead effect performed in the current fluctuation display in S631, the effect pattern and the execution timing of the look-ahead effect to be executed are set (S632), and the process proceeds to S633. Specifically, in S632, for example, in response to the confirmed data of “chance eye advance notice effect mode designation”, “background change advance effect effect mode designation”, and “hold change advance notice effect mode designation”, for example, In the display, an effect pattern of a prefetch effect such as which kind of prefetch effect is to be executed at which effect pattern and at what timing is set. In that case, the type of the prefetching effect to be executed can be determined and set based on whether or not the data in the effect mode designation area of the effect buffer is data other than “3000 (H)”. . The effect pattern of the look-ahead effect to be executed can be determined and set based on the effect pattern data stored in the data of these effect mode designated areas of the effect buffer. The execution timing of the prefetch effect to be executed can be determined and set based on referring to the effect start time for each prefetch effect type set in the prefetch effect type table of FIG.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notification flag is set (S633). The pre-reading notification flag is a flag that is set when the pre-reading notification is being executed in response to the execution of the pre-reading effect, and is set in S635 described later.

  When it is determined in S633 that the pre-reading notification flag is not set (N in S633), it is when the execution of the pre-reading notification is started corresponding to the pre-reading effect to be executed from now on. The effect pattern and execution timing of the pre-reading middle notification effect are set according to the type (S634). For example, when a chance eye announcement effect is executed, a setting is made to execute the pre-reading notification from the end of the fluctuation display. When the background change notice effect is executed, a setting is made to execute the pre-reading notification from the start of the change display. When the hold change announcement effect is executed, a setting is made to execute the pre-reading notification from the time of the hold change during the variable display. In the case of executing a plurality of types of pre-reading effects during one-variable display, as shown in FIGS. 16A, 16B, 16C, and 16D, at the time of starting the pre-reading effect whose execution timing is earlier. Make settings to start the pre-reading effect.

  Further, in S634, the production is performed such that the common prefetching notification that displays the common prefetching notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 regardless of the jackpot expectation degree is performed regardless of the type of the prefetching production. The pattern is set. Thereby, the control process when executing the pre-reading notification can be simplified. Further, in S634, regardless of the type of the prefetching effect, the prefetching notification displaying the common prefetching notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 is performed regardless of the type of the prefetching effect. An effect pattern is set. This makes it possible for the player to check whether or not the prefetching notification is being executed based on the presence or absence of the display of the common prefetching notification effect. Can be improved.

  Further, in S634, even when any of the plurality of chance eye announcement effect patterns is executed, or when any of the plurality of background change announcement effect patterns are executed, the plurality of hold patterns are held. When any of the change announcement effect patterns is executed, any type of look-ahead effect is executed in which the common pre-reading notification displaying the common pre-reading notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 is executed. You. With this, for each look-ahead effect of the chance eye notice effect, the background change notice effect, and the hold change notice effect, any type of effect mode (effect pattern) included in each look-ahead effect is executed. It is possible to confirm whether or not the pre-reading notification is being executed by the presence or absence of the display of the common pre-reading notification effect, so that the recognizability of the pre-reading effect can be further improved. In addition, the control processing when executing the pre-reading notification can be simplified.

  Next, the pre-reading notification flag is set (S635), and the flow proceeds to S642. When it is determined in S633 that the pre-reading notification flag is set (Y in S633), the data of "designation designation" in the effect buffer of FIG. It is determined whether the result is a jackpot display result (S636).

  If it is determined that the jackpot display result is not obtained in S636 (N in S636), the effect of the currently executing prefetching notification is continued during the current fluctuation display, and the effect of the prefetching notification is displayed after the fluctuation display ends. Is set (S636A), and the process proceeds to S642. As a result, when the current fluctuation display is an off-display result, the pre-reading notification is executed in a manner to continue until the next fluctuation display as shown in FIG. 25 (D2).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot display result is obtained in S636 (Y in S636), the effect of the currently executing prefetching notification is continued even during the current fluctuation display, and the effect of the prefetching notification is changed to the end of the fluctuation display. An effect pattern of the pre-reading notification is set so as to end at the time (S636B), and the process proceeds to S642. As a result, when the current variable display is a jackpot display result, the pre-reading notification is executed in a manner not to continue until the next variable display.

  In S636, S636A, and S636B, when controlling to the big hit gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of the prefetch determination target, the pre-reading middle notification is ended at the end of the variable display. When not controlled, by terminating the pre-reading notification after the end of the variable display, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state triggered by the variable display of the pre-read determination target.

  When it is determined in S630 that the display is not the variable display in which the execution of the prefetch effect is specified, and the process proceeds to S637, it is determined whether or not the prefetch notification flag is set (S637). If it is determined in S637 that the pre-reading notification flag is not set (N in S637), the process proceeds to S642. On the other hand, when it is determined in S637 that the pre-reading notification flag is set (Y in S637), it means that the pre-reading notification is being executed in response to the pre-reading effect that has already been executed. By checking the effect buffer, it is determined whether or not there is any one of the first pending storage information items for which the next prefetch effect is to be executed after the current fluctuation display (S638).

  If it is determined in S638 that there is no plan to execute the next look-ahead effect after the current fluctuation display (N in S638), the pre-reading notification flag is reset (S639), and a predetermined period from the start of the current fluctuation display. An effect pattern for ending the pre-reading notification effect at the elapse of (for example, about 5 seconds) is set (S640), and the process proceeds to S642.

  Therefore, the pre-reading notification corresponding to the pre-reading effect is executed in a manner to continue until the next fluctuation display by S636A even when the fluctuation display of the pre-read determination target is executed, and by S638 to S640, as the first hold storage information. When there is no scheduled execution of the next prefetching effect, the process is continued until a predetermined time elapses after the start of the fluctuation display one time after the prefetching determination target.

  In this way, by ending the pre-reading notification not after the end of the variable display of the pre-read determination target but after the end, the player can determine which variable display of the variable display of the pre-read determination target when the pre-reading effect is executed. Can not be easily identified, and the variation display of the pre-read determination target is made difficult to be identified by the player, so that a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, when not controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the display result of the variable display of the prefetch determination target, by finishing the pre-reading notification after the end of the variable display, the big hit gaming state triggered by the variable display of the prefetch determination target It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the game is not controlled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S638 that there is a plan to execute the next prefetching effect after the current fluctuation display (Y in S638), the prefetching notification flag is not reset, and the currently executing prefetching notification is effected. Is set during the present fluctuation display, and the effect pattern of the prefetching notification is set so that the effect of the prefetching notification is continued even after the end of the fluctuation display (S641), and the process proceeds to S642.

  As described above, when there are a plurality of prefetch determination targets, from the end of the variation display of the first prefetch determination target in which the variation display is performed first, the variation display of the second prefetch determination target in which the variation display is performed later is performed. Since the pre-reading notification is executed in a manner that continues during the period up to the start, the specific effect is continuously executed even after the end of the variable display of the preceding pre-read determination target until the subsequent variable display of the pre-read determination target. It is possible to give the player the impression that the game has been performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game between the plurality of variable displays of the prefetch determination target.

  Next, in S642, a process of setting various other effects other than the above-described prefetching effect and the prefetching middle notification effect is executed (S642). After that, the effect setting process ends.

  Based on the effect control setting based on the execution of the process of S632 in such effect setting process, based on the effect pattern and execution timing set in S632 by the effect symbol changing process (S802) shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 16, any one of the chance eye announcement effect, the background change announcement effect, and the hold change announcement effect, or any one or more of the effects are executed.

  Further, based on the setting of the effect control based on the execution of the processes of S634, S636A, S636B, S640, and S641 in the effect setting process, the process is set in S632 by the effect design changing process (S802) illustrated in FIG. 14. Based on the effect pattern, the effect of the pre-reading notification as shown in FIG. 17 is executed.

  Next, the flow of a specific effect when the zone announcement effect is executed will be described. First, the first zone announcement effect will be described. FIG. 32 is a time chart showing an effect mode of the first zone notice effect, and FIG. 33 is a view showing a flow of the first zone notice effect. Here, the case where the first zone announcement effect is executed in the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the first zone announcement effect is started when a game ball that generates the first zone announcement effect is awarded. At this time, a shutter image is displayed on the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 300S starts to be displayed, and a completely closed shutter image is displayed. When the target fluctuation starts, the state is switched from the state where the closed shutter image 300S is displayed to the state where the shutter image 300S is opened and the state where the shutter image is not displayed. Before the start of the target fluctuation, a shutter closing zone announcement effect in which the completely closed shutter image 300S is displayed is executed.

  When the target variation starts, a special background image 300T (see FIG. 18B) is further displayed, and a zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened is executed. After the shutter release, the zone announcement effect is executed, and the BGM executed in the BGM effect is switched from the normal BGM (normal BGM) to the zone announcement effect BGM (hereinafter, referred to as zone BGM). Subsequently, the mode shifts to the normal reach and the super reach, but the display of the special background table image 300T and the BGM are not switched during this time. After that, when the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation, the BGM is switched from the zone BGM to the super reach BGM (SR BGM, hereinafter referred to as “super BGM”).

  The flow up to this point will be described with reference to FIG. 33. In a normal effect before the first zone announcement effect is started, for example, as shown in FIG. An image in which the decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are variably displayed is displayed. At this time, as the BGM effect, a BGM effect in which normal BGM is output from the speaker 27 (hereinafter, referred to as a normal BGM effect) is being executed. The normal BGM is, for example, a BGM in which gentle music flows.

  When the first zone announcement effect is started during the execution of the normal effect, first, the zone announcement effect during shutter closing is started. As shown in FIG. 33B, in the zone announcement effect during shutter closing, the shutter images 300S are displayed from the left and right sides of the effect display device 9, and the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right are displayed by the shutter image. Is hidden. In a normal effect, the effect display device 9 displays a normal effect image together with the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R, but these effect images are also hidden. It is. The shutter image 300S is displayed on the zone effect display layer shown in FIG. Therefore, when the shutter image 300S is completely displayed, the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are hidden by the shutter image 300S as shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 33B, the left decorative pattern 5L and the right decorative pattern 5R among the left decorative pattern 5L, the middle decorative pattern 5C, and the right decorative pattern 5R are hidden by the shutter image 300S. Is shown. When the shutter image 300S is displayed, the small symbol image 300A and the reserved image H are displayed in the small symbol display area shown in FIG. The small symbol image 300A displays the same symbol image as the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R. When a part or all of the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are variably displayed, the same variably displayed is performed also in the small symbol image 300A. The small symbol image 300A is displayed at the time of the zone announcement effect during shutter closing in which the shutter image 300S is displayed. Also, the hold image H may be displayed at times other than the zone announcement effect during shutter closing. The zone announcement effect while the shutter is closed may be performed over a plurality of changes, but by displaying the reserved image H, the effect display device 9 is visually recognized, so that the end of one change is completed. I understand it. When the shutter announcement effect is started, the BGM output from the speaker as the BGM effect switches from the normal BGM to the BGM effect that outputs the zone BGM (hereinafter, referred to as zone BGM). The zone BGM is, for example, a BGM that has a faster tempo than the normal BGM and enhances the player's euphoria than the normal BGM.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 33C, when the shutter image 300S covers the entire surface of the effect display device 9, a chance image 300Z composed of the characters “CHANCE ZONE” is displayed in front of the shutter image 300S. At this time, the zone BGM effect is being executed as the BGM effect.

  When the chance image 300Z composed of the characters “CHANCE ZONE” is displayed for a predetermined time, for example, 5 seconds, as shown in FIG. 33D, a first special character 300C1 and a second special character are displayed on the front of the shutter image 300S. The character 300C2, the third special character, and the like (see FIG. 33D) are alternately displayed while changing poses and clothes. The first special character 300C1, the second special character 300C2, the third special character, and the like may be characters displayed in a normal effect, or may be characters used only in the first zone announcement effect. At this time, the zone BGM is executed as the BGM effect.

  Subsequently, when the target variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (E), an image in which the shutter image 300S is opened is displayed, and then a zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened is executed. In the zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 33 (F), the effect display device 9 displays the left decorative symbol 5L and the middle decorative symbol 5C in correspondence with the variable display corresponding to the hold storage information of the target. , The right decorative symbol 5R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, a special background image 300T is displayed on the upper and lower portions of the effect display device 9, respectively. The special background image 300T is displayed together with the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, the right decorative symbol 5R, a background image in a normal effect, and the like. In a state where the special background image 300T is not displayed, the same effect as the effect performed at the normal time is executed. The special background image 300T is displayed on the zone effect display layer shown in FIG. By displaying the special background image 300T, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect is after the zone notice effect is executed. At this time, the zone BGM is executed as the BGM effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (G), the left decorative symbol 5L and the right decorative symbol 5R are stopped and displayed with the same numeral, and if the middle decorative symbol 5C is in a fluctuating state, the reach state is established. The zone announcement effect (zone announcement effect after opening the shutter) ends, and the process proceeds to the reach effect after the end of the first zone announcement effect. Hereinafter, the reach (reach state, reach effect) after the zone notice effect is referred to as special reach (special reach condition, special reach effect). The special reach also has a normal reach and a super reach, which are referred to as a special normal reach (special normal reach state and special normal reach production) and a special super reach (special super reach state and special super reach production, respectively). The reach state shown in FIG. 32 (F) is a special normal reach state. Even after the transition to the special normal reach state, the special background image 300T remains displayed, and the BGM output as the BGM effect from the speaker 27 remains as the zone BGM.

  After the special normal reach state, subsequently, as shown in FIG. The special super reach includes special lower super reach (special lower super reach state, special lower super reach directing) and special upper super reach (special upper super reach state, special upper super reach directing). Move to reach. In the special lower super-reach state, the decorative symbol is not displayed, and the justice-side super reach character 300M1 and the enemy-side super reach character 300E1 are displayed. Even after shifting from the special normal reach state to the special lower super reach state, the special background image 300T remains displayed, and the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect.

  Thereafter, when special lower super reach is being performed, as shown in FIG. 33 (I), when the staging operation of the special character for effect 60 is performed, a transition is made from the special lower super reach to the special upper super reach. When shifting from the special lower super reach to the special upper super reach, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to a BGM effect in which the super BGM is output from the speaker 27 (hereinafter referred to as a super BGM effect). The super BGM is a BGM that enhances the player's euphoria more than the zone BGM. The special effect image 300T is still displayed on the effect display device 9.

  After performing the tilting operation, the staging part 60 returns to the original position as shown in FIG. 33 (A) and the like as shown in FIG. 33 (J). In addition, when the special upper super reach is executed, the effect display device 9 displays a justice side deformed super reach character 300M2 in which the justice side super reach character M1 has changed, and an enemy side deformed super reach character 300E2. You. At this time, the special background image 300T is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the BGM effect is super BGM.

  Next, the second zone announcement effect will be described. FIG. 34 is a time chart showing an effect mode of the second zone announcement effect, and FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flow of the second zone announcement effect. Here, the case where the second zone announcement effect is executed in the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the second zone announcement effect is started when a reach (normal reach) is established while the target variation is being executed. When the reach is established and the normal reach is started, the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 18A starts to display the shutter image 300S, and enters a state where a completely closed shutter image is displayed. Subsequently, the state where the shutter image 300S is opened is displayed from the state where the closed shutter image 300S is displayed, and the state is switched to a state where the shutter image is not displayed. The time during which the closed shutter image 300S is displayed is short, for example, about 1 second.

  When the shutter image 300S is no longer displayed, a special background image 300T (see FIG. 18B) is further displayed. As described above, in the second zone announcement effect, the zone announcement effect during the shutter closing and the zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened are continuously executed. Further, the BGM output from the speaker 27 is switched from normal BGM to zone BGM. Subsequently, the mode shifts to the normal reach and the super reach, but the display of the special background table image 300T and the BGM are not switched during this time. After that, when the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation, the BGM is switched from the zone BGM to the super BGM.

  The flow up to this point will be described with reference to FIG. 35. As shown in FIG. 35 (A), in the effect display device 9, the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are variably displayed. 35B, the left decorative symbol 5L and the right decorative symbol 5R are stopped and displayed at the same number as shown in FIG. 35 (B), and the middle decorative symbol 5C is in a fluctuating state. Reach state. Up to this point, the BGM effect is a normal BGM effect.

  In the reach state, as shown in FIG. 35 (C), the shutter images 300S are displayed from the left and right sides of the effect display device 9, respectively. The left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right are displayed by the shutter image 300S. The decorative design 5R and the normal effect image are hidden. At this time, the BGM effect switches from the normal BGM to the zone BGM.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 33, the shutter image 300 </ b> S has been kept closed until the target display starts to change, so that the shutter image 300 </ b> S may last for a long time, for example, several seconds to several minutes. In the example, the state in which the image in which the shutter image 300S is closed is displayed is very short, for example, about 1 second. However, the state in which the image in which the shutter image 300S is closed may be displayed for less than 1 second, for example, as long as the player can recognize that the image in which the shutter image 300S is closed is displayed, for example, about 100 ms. It may be longer than 1 second, for example, about 3 seconds or 5 seconds.

  The period from when the shutter image 300S is closed to when the opened image is displayed is a shutter closing zone announcement effect. For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 35, the zone announcement during shutter closing is completed in a very short time. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35 (D), an image in which the shutter image 300S is opened is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 35 (E), the characters "CHANCE ZONE" are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35 (F), the process proceeds to a reach effect (special normal reach effect), and a special background image 300T is displayed on the upper and lower portions of the effect display device 9 together with the reach effect. For this reason, in the second zone announcement effect, the announcement effect after the shutter is opened is not executed, and the second zone announcement effect is constituted only by the zone announcement during shutter closing.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35 (G), the special normal reach is advanced to a special super reach (special lower super reach). For special normal reach and special super reach, an effect common to the example shown in FIG. 33 is executed. While the special lower reach is executed after the special normal reach is executed, the zone BGM effect is executed as the BGM effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35 (H), when the staging action of the production accessory 60 moves, the special lower super reach is shifted to the special upper super reach. When shifting from special lower super reach to special upper super reach, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect. The special effect image 300T is still displayed on the effect display device 9.

  After performing the tilting operation, the staging part 60 returns to the original position as shown in FIG. 33 (A) and the like as shown in FIG. 35 (I). In addition, when the special upper super reach is executed, the effect display device 9 displays a justice side deformed super reach character 300M2 in which the justice side super reach character M1 has changed, and an enemy side deformed super reach character 300E2. You. At this time, the special background image 300T remains displayed on the effect display device 9, and the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect.

  Next, the third zone announcement effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a time chart showing an effect mode of the third zone notice effect, and FIG. 37 is a view showing a flow of the third zone notice effect. Here, the case where the second zone announcement effect is executed in the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the third zone announcement effect is started when the target reach has been executed and the reach has changed from the normal reach to the super reach. When the normal reach is changed to the super reach, the shutter display image 300S starts to be displayed on the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 18A, and a completely closed shutter image is displayed. Subsequently, the state where the shutter image 300S is opened is displayed from the state where the closed shutter image 300S is displayed, and the state is switched to a state where the shutter image is not displayed. The time during which the closed shutter image 300S is displayed is short, for example, about 1 second.

  When the shutter image 300S is no longer displayed, a special background image 300T (see FIG. 18B) is further displayed. As described above, in the third zone announcement effect, the zone announcement effect during shutter closing and the zone announcement effect after shutter opening are continuously executed. Further, the BGM effect is switched from the normal BGM effect to the zone BGM effect. Subsequently, the super reach is executed. During this time, the display of the special background table image 300T and the BGM are not switched. After that, when the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation, the BGM production is switched from the zone BGM production to the super BGM production.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the effect display device 9, the image in which the left decorative pattern 5 </ b> L, the middle decorative pattern 5 </ b> C, and the right decorative pattern 5 </ b> R are variably displayed is displayed. As shown in (5), when the left decorative symbol 5L and the right decorative symbol 5R are stopped and displayed with the same numbers, and the middle decorative symbol 5C is in a fluctuating state, the reach state is set.

  After the reach state is reached, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), the decorative pattern 5C in the middle temporarily stops and then develops into a super reach. When developing into super reach, as shown in FIG. 37 (D), shutter images 300S are displayed from the left and right sides of the effect display device 9, respectively, and the left decorative pattern 5L, the middle decorative pattern 5C, and the right are displayed by the shutter images 300S. The decorative design 5R and the normal effect image are hidden. At this time, the BGM effect switches from the normal BGM effect to the zone BGM effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 37 as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 35, the state in which the image in which the shutter image 300S is closed is displayed is very short, for example, about 1 second. However, the state in which the shutter image 300S displays the closed image may be shorter or longer than one second. In the example shown in FIG. 37, as in the example shown in FIG. 35, the announcement effect after the shutter is opened is not executed, and the zone announcement effect is constituted only by the zone announcement during shutter closing.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 37 (E), an image in which the shutter image 300S is released is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 37 (F), the characters “CHANCE ZONE” are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (G), when an image in which the shutter image 300S is released is displayed, special super reach (special lower super reach) is executed. For the special super reach, an effect common to the example shown in FIG. 33 is executed. While the special lower super reach is being executed, the zone BGM effect is being executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 37 (H), when the staging operation of the special effect object 60 is performed, the special lower super reach is shifted to the special upper super reach. When shifting from the special lower super reach to the special upper super reach, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect. The special effect image 300T is still displayed on the effect display device 9.

  After performing the tilting operation, the staging part 60 returns to the original position as shown in FIG. 33 (A) and the like as shown in FIG. 37 (I). In addition, when the special upper super reach is executed, the effect display device 9 displays a justice side deformed super reach character 300M2 in which the justice side super reach character M1 has changed, and an enemy side deformed super reach character 300E2. You. At this time, the special background image 300T remains displayed on the effect display device 9, and the BGM effect remains in the zone BGM.

  Next, as compared with the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 31, when there is no character action of the effect accessory 60 (effect pattern 3), the character does not evolve into super reach and the effect operation of the effect accessory 60 does not evolve. When there is no (the effect pattern 1), when there is a role action before the normal reach (the effect pattern 2), when there is a role action of the role for the action 60 twice before the normal reach and after the start of the super reach (the effect pattern). 6) will be described. Here, the case where the effect in each effect pattern is executed in the first zone announcement effect will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an effect mode in the case where the first zone announcement effect is executed in effect pattern 3. As shown in FIG. 38, in the effect pattern 3 of the first zone announcement effect, a similar effect is executed until the super reach development time, as compared with the effect pattern 5 of the first zone announcement effect shown in FIG. After the development to the super reach (special super reach), in the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 32, the staging character 60 performs the tilting operation, and the BGM effect switches from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect, as shown in FIG. In the effect pattern 3, the effect member 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect, and there is no switching to the super BGM effect. As described above, when the special use object 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM effect is not changed.

  In addition, in the second zone announcement production and the third zone announcement production, when the special role accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation during the special super reach, the BGM production remains in the zone BGM production, and the super BGM production is performed. There is no switching.

  FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an effect mode in a case where the first zone announcement effect is executed in the effect pattern 1. As shown in FIG. 39, the effect 1 of the first zone announcement effect is similar to the effect pattern 5 of the first zone announcement effect shown in FIG. The effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 32 has developed into super reach, but the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 39 does not develop into super reach, and there is no tilting movement of the effect member 60 during super reach. In this case, the BGM effect remains the zone BGM effect, and does not switch to the super BGM effect. In this way, when there is no development to super reach and the staging accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM effect is not changed.

  In addition, in the second zone announcement production and the third zone announcement production, if there is no development to the super reach and the production accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM production remains in the zone BGM production, There is no switch to BGM production.

  FIG. 40 is a time chart illustrating an effect mode in a case where the first zone announcement effect is executed in the effect pattern 2. As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect pattern 2 of the first zone announcement effect, the staging action of the staging accessory 60 during the normal reach does not develop into the super reach, so the staging effect 60 during the super reach. Does not perform the tilting operation. When the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation during the normal reach, the BGM production remains as the zone BGM production, as shown in FIG. Thus, even when the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation, if the super reach (special super reach) is not being performed, here, if the normal reach is being performed, there is no change in the BGM production.

  In addition, in the second zone announcement production and the third zone announcement production, if there is no development to the super reach and the production accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM production remains in the zone BGM production, There is no switch to BGM production. In addition, even if the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation during the normal production before the normal reach, the BGM production may not be switched.

  FIG. 41 is a time chart illustrating an effect mode in a case where the zone announcement effect is executed in the effect pattern 6. Here, a case will be described in which the zone announcement effect is started at the time of winning the first starting opening. As shown in FIG. 40, in the effect pattern 2 of the first zone announcement effect, the double effect accessory 60 in the normal reach and the super reach (special super reach) performs a tilting operation. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41, when the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation during the normal reach, the BGM production remains in the zone BGM production, and the production combination during the super reach (special super reach). When the object 60 performs the tilting operation, the BGM effect switches from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect. In this way, even when the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation twice, if the super reach (special super reach) is not being performed, here, if the normal reach is being performed, the BGM does not change and the super reach (special super reach) is not performed. The BGM effect changes when the effect accessory 60 performs two tilting operations during (super reach).

  In addition, in the second zone announcement production and the third zone announcement production, if there is no development to the super reach and the production accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM production remains in the zone BGM production, There is no switch to BGM production. In addition, even if the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation during the normal production before the normal reach, the BGM production may not be switched.

  In the above-described zone announcement effects, the normal BGM, the zone BGM, and the super BGM may be any appropriate music, lines, sound effects, or a combination thereof. The normal BGM, the zone BGM, and the super BGM may be completely different types (modes) of music or the like. For example, a song with only musical instrument performance may be used as the normal BGM or zone BGM, and a song with vocals may be used in the super BGM. Alternatively, the music may be a music in which the number of instruments used increases as the normal BGM, the zone BGM, and the super BGM progress. Also, different types of music may be used as the super BGM depending on whether or not the zone announcement effect has been performed. Thus, for example, by switching the tune including the vocal only after the zone announcement effect, it is possible to appeal to the player that the effect corresponding to the situation with higher expectation is being executed.

  Further, in each zone notice, the shutter image 300S and the special background image 300T are displayed, but the pre-reading notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 may be displayed together with the shutter image 300S and the special background image 300T. . In the zone announcement effect, the shutter image 300S is displayed at a timing such as when the first starting opening is awarded, when the reach is established, or when the super reach is developed, and then the special background image 300T is displayed. Instead, the special background image 300T may be displayed at the timing when the shutter image 300S is displayed. Further, the shutter image 300S may be displayed a plurality of times (two or more times).

[Second embodiment]
Next, a second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, at least during the execution of the variable display, an adjusting means capable of adjusting the effect of the effect according to the adjusting operation by the player, and an adjusting image for displaying an adjusting image corresponding to the adjusting by the adjusting means for a predetermined period of time. Display means, wherein the adjusted image display means, when the variable display result is derived and displayed within a predetermined period, does not visually recognize or adjust the adjusted image during the period in which the variable display result is derived and displayed in the predetermined period. A description will be given of a pachinko gaming machine provided with a specific notifying unit that is difficult. In addition, about the part etc. common to 1st Embodiment, a common code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description may be abbreviate | omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the effect image showing the change effect character displayed on the change effect display layer shown in FIG. 19 is arranged at an overlapping position on the front side of the effect image showing the effect design serving as the identification information image. Can be. Note that the plurality of layers may include an error image display layer. Then, for example, by setting the Z value of the error image display layer so as to be located on the front side of the small symbol display layer, the priority of the error image (see FIGS. 43 (D1) and (D2)) can be changed. May be set to be higher than the effect image.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an effect setting process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100. FIG. 43 is a display screen diagram of the effect display executed in the effect display device 9 in accordance with the effect effect setting process.

  The effect setting process is performed after the look-ahead effect process (S700) as a process different from S800 to S807 relating to a series of effect control processes in the effect control process process as shown in FIG.

  In this embodiment, by executing the effect setting processing described below, during the game (FIG. 43 (A)) or during the customer waiting demonstration display (FIG. 43 (B)), the player makes an adjustment operation. The sound volume as a staging effect can be adjusted. When the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result image R indicating the result of the volume adjustment is displayed in a predetermined area of the effect display device 9 in a manner superimposed on the effect image and the demonstration image. The adjustment result image R is displayed, for example, in a bar graph display mode that increases and decreases in the left-right direction, as shown in FIGS. The mode of the adjustment result image R is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode of displaying numerical values or characters corresponding to the volume, a pie chart mode, or the like.

  In this embodiment, in the menu mode, when the item “volume adjustment” is selected from the menu screen (FIG. 43 (C1)) and the volume adjustment mode is selected (FIG. 43 (C2)). Only the volume can be adjusted. While the volume adjustment mode is selected, the adjustment result image R is always displayed. In addition, as described later, in response to receiving a predetermined operation during the customer waiting demonstration display, the display shifts to the menu mode from the customer waiting demonstration display.

  When the effect setting process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the menu mode is being executed (SA701). For example, effect control CPU 101 determines that the menu mode is being executed if the menu mode execution flag is on, and determines that the menu mode is not being executed if the flag is off.

  If the menu mode is not being executed (SA701; No), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the adjustment result image displaying flag is on (SA702). Note that the adjustment result image displaying flag is set to an on state in SA708 and SA715 described later, and is cleared to an off state in SA704 and SA712.

  When the adjustment result image displaying flag is on (SA702; Yes), the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the reception of the adjustment operation (SA703). Here, the adjustment operation (adjustment operation) is, for example, an operation performed by a player using operation means such as the stick controller 122, and in this embodiment, an operation for adjusting the volume as a staging effect. . The player adjusts the sound volume from a predetermined range (for example, six levels from 1 to 6) by tilting the stick controller 122 left and right, and the volume at the time when the tilting operation is stopped is reduced. It is determined as the volume as the adjustment result.

  The operation of determining the volume may be performed by performing a push / pull operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 or a press operation on the push button 120 separately from the adjustment operation. The operation means for adjusting the volume is not limited to the stick controller 122, and may be a cross key (not shown), a dial-type operation means, or the like. Further, instead of the operation means, a non-contact type sensor (for example, a photo sensor or the like) may be used, and the effect of the effect may be adjusted by an adjustment operation of the player detected by the sensor.

  The predetermined period T1 is predetermined as a display period of the adjustment result image R indicating the result of adjusting the volume. The predetermined period T1 is arbitrary as long as the period is appropriate for the player to check the adjustment result, and is set to about several seconds (for example, 2 to 10 seconds) in this embodiment. Whether or not the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the reception of the adjustment operation corresponds to, for example, a predetermined timer corresponding to the predetermined period T1 when it is determined that an adjustment operation is performed (SA706; Yes) in SA706 described later. A value may be set to determine whether the timer has timed out.

  The adjustment operation (adjustment operation) may be an operation for adjusting the display luminance (light amount) of the effect display device 9 or the effect lamp as the effect. Then, the adjustment result image R may indicate the adjustment result of the luminance. Further, it is only necessary that at least one of the volume and the luminance can be adjusted according to the adjustment operation. In addition, the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image corresponding to the volume is displayed and the predetermined period during which the adjustment result image according to the luminance is displayed may be set to the same length, or may be set to different lengths. It may be.

  Here, an example in which the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the effect display device 9 when the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect.

  The fluctuation display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol is executed, and when the fluctuation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state as shown in FIG. 44 (A), a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and thereafter, FIG. By displaying the development notification image (“Super Reach!” In the illustrated example) shown on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. When the player performs an adjustment operation during the change, an adjustment result image R is displayed at the lower right corner of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 44B (corresponding to SA710).

  Following such a development notification, the operation promoting image P is displayed during execution of the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. Then, when an operation is performed by the push button 31B, a predetermined cut-in effect is executed as shown in FIG. In addition, when the operation with the push button 31B is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), for example, the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  Until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R is still displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed, the adjustment result image R is deleted as shown in FIG. 44E (corresponding to SA712). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the derived display result.

It can be said that the second embodiment has the following configuration.
(1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of performing a variable display of identification information and deriving and displaying a display result. ), And an effect control CPU 101 for executing the processing of SA706 and SA707, and an adjustment image corresponding to the adjustment by the adjusting means (for example, FIGS. 44B to 44D). (For example, the effect control CPU 101 for executing the processing of SA708, SA703, and SA704) for displaying the adjustment result image R shown in (1) for a predetermined period (for example, the predetermined period T1). In a case where the variable display result is derived and displayed within the predetermined period, a period during which the variable display result is derived and displayed in the predetermined period (for example, In the derived display period T2), the adjusted image cannot be visually recognized (for example, the effect control CPU 101 executes the processing of SA710 to SA712, etc.) or is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the adjusted image is displayed in a translucent manner or blinks, etc.). ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the variable display result derived and displayed.

  (2) In the gaming machine of (1), at least a part of the display area of the adjustment image overlaps at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result (for example, see FIG. 43A). Is also good. According to such a configuration, since the adjusted image result image overlapping at least a part of the derived display area of the variable display result is deleted, it is possible to suppress a decrease in visibility of the variable display result.

  (3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2), the error image may not be deleted even during the derivation display of the variable display result (for example, see FIG. 43 (D2)). According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the display of the error image is prioritized over the display of the adjustment image (the effect control CPU 101 that has received the abnormality notification command indicates the command. Until the error is eliminated, the display of the error image as shown in FIGS. 43 (D1) and 43 (D2) may be continued. According to such a configuration, the visibility of the error image can be ensured.

  (5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4), when the adjustment operation is performed, the demo display is maintained so as to be visible (for example, see FIG. 43B), but the menu display operation is performed. May be deleted when the demo is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the demonstration display.

  (6) In the gaming machine of any of the above (1) to (5), a deciding means (a gaming control microcomputer) for determining whether or not to control to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player. 560, a large hit determination process by the CPU 56) and display means for performing a variation display of the identification information in accordance with the determination result of the determination means and deriving and displaying a variation display result (for example, a production control process process of the production control CPU 101). ) And a specific effect execution means (for example, a process of the effect control CPU 101 for executing a character display process for a change effect) capable of displaying a specific effect image during the execution of the change display of the identification information. The effect image can be arranged at an overlapping position at least on the front side of a part of the identification information (see, for example, FIG. 19B). In the period during which the variation display result of the identification information is derived, the output execution means sets the display mode of the specific effect image to a static mode at a position overlapping ahead of the identification information (for example, the effect control CPU 101). However, the display mode of the specific effect image may be set to a static mode at a position overlapping on the front side of the effect symbol). According to such a configuration, erroneous recognition of the display result can be prevented.

Next, main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIGS. 32 to 41, when the zone display effect is executed by the effect display device 9, a zone BGM effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 32, FIG. 33 (G), FIG. 34, FIG. 35 (E), FIG. 36, FIG. 37 (E), etc., while the zone BGM effect is being executed, the special super reach is being executed. At times, when the production accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation, the BGM production remains as the zone BGM production.

  On the other hand, while the special super-reach is being executed while the zone BGM effect is being executed, when the staging operation of the effect accessory 60 is performed, FIG. 32, FIG. ), FIG. 34, FIG. 35 (E) (F), FIG. 36, FIG. 37 (E) (F), etc., the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect. Further, in the case where the staging accessory 60 performs the tilting operation, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the case where the staging accessory 60 does not perform the tilting operation. For this reason, when the tilting operation of the production accessory 60 in which the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit gaming state is increased, the super BGM effect for increasing the expectation of the big hit is executed, so that the expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is achieved. It is possible to emphasize that the situation is higher, and to improve the interest.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 32 and 38 to 41, the first zone notice effect is executed when the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (when passing through the first starting winning opening). You. For this reason, according to the passing of the game ball to the first start winning opening 13, it is possible to generate a situation in which the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit gaming state is high. Therefore, the situation where the degree of expectation controlled in the big hit game state is high can be maintained for a long time, and the interest can be improved.

  (3) As the zone announcement effect, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 38 to 41, a first zone announcement effect that is executed from before the target change to during the target change is provided. Since the zone announcement effect is executed when the expectation of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is high, the first zone announcement effect is executed from before the target change to during the target change, thereby entering the big hit game state. Expectation to be controlled can be maintained for a long time. In the first zone announcement effect, a zone announcement effect during shutter closing is executed before the target change, and a zone announcement effect after the invention shutter is opened after the target change is started. For this reason, the zone announcement effect is executed for a long time, but since the effect contents can be diversified, the tiredness of the player can be suppressed and the interest can be improved.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 32 and 38 to 41, the zone announcement effect can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations as in the first zone announcement effect, or the second zone announcement effect and the third zone announcement effect can be executed. It can also be executed with a single change, as in a zone announcement effect. For this reason, even when the first zone announcement effect does not start before the target change, the zone announcement effect may be executed due to the target change, so that the expectation for the execution of the zone announcement effect can be maintained for a long time. In the second zone announcement effect and the third zone announcement effect, the zone announcement effect with the shutter closed and the zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened are continuously performed with the target fluctuation of 1. For this reason, diversification of effects can be achieved.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 19 (B), the zone effect display layer on which the shutter image displayed in the zone announcement effect is displayed is the second Z value assigned to the plurality of layers from the smaller side. “1” (display priority is second). For this reason, when the shutter image is displayed, the image displayed in the display area other than the small symbol display area in which the Z value with the higher display priority is set is difficult or invisible to the player. For this reason, the shutter image can be surely visually recognized by the player. The background and the character displayed in the reach effect are executed on a display layer having a larger Z value (lower display priority) than the zone effect display layer. For this reason, when the shutter image is displayed, it is difficult or invisible for the player to see regardless of what reach effect is being performed, so the shutter image is displayed even when performing the normal effect. Will remain. Therefore, even if another effect is performed as usual while the zone announcement effect is being performed while the shutter is closed, the uncomfortable feeling given to the player can be reduced or eliminated.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 18 (B) and FIG. 33 (E), in the zone announcement effect, the special background image 300T is displayed on the effect display device 9 in the zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened. As shown in FIG. 33 (G), the special background image 300T is displayed on the effect display device 9 even after the zone announcement effect (the zone announcement effect after the shutter is opened) is completed and the scene is developed after shifting to the super-reach effect. Is done. For this reason, while the super-reach effect is being executed, it is possible to recognize that the super-reach effect has passed through the zone notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit gaming state is high.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 41, the staging accessory 60 shown in FIG. 1 may perform two tilting operations. Here, in the case where the production accessory 60 performs a tilting operation during the zone announcement production after the shutter is opened before developing into the super reach production, the BGM production remains in the zone BGM production, and after the development into the super reach production. When the production accessory 60 performs the tilting operation, the BGM production switches from the zone BGM production to the super BGM production. As described above, even when the tilting operation of the production accessory 60 is performed, the BGM production is switched or not switched depending on the situation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big hit game state by the tilting operation of the production accessory 60. Therefore, the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the situation in which the character effect is performed is executed, and thus it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the character effect and suppress an excessive increase in the sense of expectation.

  (8) As shown in FIGS. 32 to 41, when the zone display effect is executed by the effect display device 9, the zone BGM effect is executed. If the special production 60 does not perform the tilting operation during the special super reach (special lower super reach) production after the end of the zone announcement production, the BGM production remains the zone BGM production. On the other hand, if the special role accessory 60 performs a tilting motion while the special super reach (special lower super reach) effect is being performed, the special lower super reach effect is shifted to the special upper super reach effect, and the BGM is changed to the zone BGM. Is switched to Super BGM.

  In the case where the performance accessory 60 performs the tilting operation, the degree of expectation of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than when the tilting operation is not performed. In addition, when the special role product 60 performs the tilting operation while the special super reach effect is being executed, the BGM effect is switched from the zone BGM to the super BGM. For this reason, when the special role object 60 performs the tilting operation and the BGM effect is switched, the degree of expectation to be controlled to the big hit gaming state is high. Therefore, it can be emphasized that the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is high due to a change in the BGM effect.

  (9) As shown in FIGS. 16 (B1) to (B3) and the like, in response to the execution of the prefetching effect as the specific effect, the prefetching notification in the common mode is executed regardless of the type of the prefetching effect. Thereby, the player can easily recognize whether or not the prefetch effect is being performed, and the recognizability of a plurality of types of prefetch effects can be improved.

  (10) In addition to executing the pre-reading notification in a common mode irrespective of the type of pre-reading effect, furthermore, any one of the plurality of chance eye announcement effect patterns is determined by S634 or the like in FIG. A common look-ahead is executed, when any one of the plurality of background change announcement effect patterns is executed, and when any of the plurality of pending change announcement effect patterns are executed. By executing the middle notification, it is possible to improve the recognizability of the prefetch effect in a plurality of types of effect modes, and it is possible to further improve the recognizability of the prefetch effect.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 25 (D2), regarding the pre-reading notification, the pre-reading notification is ended not after the end of the variable display of the pre-read determination target but after the end, so that the pre-reading when the pre-reading effect is executed is performed. The player can not easily identify which variation display is the variation display of the determination target, and it is difficult for the player to identify the variation display of the prefetch determination target, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game. it can.

  (12) Regarding the pre-reading notification, in addition to terminating the pre-reading notification not after the end of the variable display of the pre-read determination target but after the end, a plurality of chance-eye announcement effect patterns are further determined by S634 or the like in FIG. When any of these effect patterns are executed, and when any of the plurality of background change notice effect patterns are executed, any of the plurality of hold change notice effect patterns are executed. Also, when the common pre-reading notification is executed, it is possible to improve the recognizability of the pre-reading effect in a plurality of types of effect forms, and it is possible to further improve the recognizability of the pre-reading effect.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 25 (D1), when a plurality of types of look-ahead effects are executed in response to one change display, at the start of the look-ahead effect by the background notice effect that is started first, Since the execution of the prefetching notification is started, the execution time of the prefetching notification when a plurality of specific effects are executed can be set to an appropriate time.

  (14) When the specific effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays as shown in FIGS. 25 (B1) and (C1), the pre-reading notification is made over a plurality of variable displays as shown in (D1). Is executable, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notification corresponding to the execution time of the pre-reading effect, and it is possible to further improve the recognizability of the pre-reading effect.

  (15) As shown in FIG. 25 (D3), for the pre-reading notification, when there are a plurality of pre-read determination targets, the variable display of the next second pre-read determination target starts from the end of the variable display of the previous pre-read determination target. Since the notification is performed in a manner that continues during the period up to the start of the display, even after the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target, the prefetch notice effect continues to be performed until the next variable display of the prefetch determination target It is possible to give the player the impression that the game has been performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game between the variable displays of a plurality of prefetch determination targets.

  (16) In S634, regardless of the type of prefetching effect, the common prefetching notification that displays the common prefetching notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 regardless of the jackpot expectation degree is executed. An effect pattern is set. Thereby, the control process when executing the pre-reading notification can be simplified.

  (17) In S634, regardless of the type of the prefetching effect, the prefetching notification displaying the common prefetching notification image 94 shown in FIG. 16 is performed regardless of the type of the prefetching effect. , An effect pattern is set. This makes it possible for the player to confirm whether or not the pre-reading notification is being executed based on the presence or absence of the display of the predetermined effect. it can.

  (18) As shown in the second embodiment, until the predetermined period T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed, the adjustment result image R is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIGS. , And the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position that does not overlap the development notification image or the operation promotion image P (an example of the specific effect image). However, in the variable display result derivation period T2, even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed, the adjustment result image R is deleted as shown in FIG. 44E (corresponding to SA712). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the derived display result.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the above-described embodiment will be enumerated below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, as the zone announcement effect as the specific effect, the pattern in which the zone announcement effect during shutter closing is executed before the target change is only one pattern of the first zone announcement effect. More than one pattern may be set. The pattern in which the zone announcement effect during shutter closing and the zone announcement effect after opening the shutter during one change are two patterns of the second zone announcement effect and the third zone announcement effect, but one pattern is set. Or three or more patterns may be set. Alternatively, this pattern may not be set.

  (2) The first zone announcement effect is started when a game ball wins at the first start winning opening, but is executed at another timing, for example, when a game ball wins at the first start winning opening. The zone announcement effect may be started at the start of the next change or the next change, or the change next to the change when the game ball wins at the first start winning opening, or in the middle of the next change May be started.

  (3) The second zone announcement effect and the third zone announcement effect are effects that are executed only by the target variation, but the presence / absence of execution is determined by the look-ahead effect. On the other hand, a specific effect (such as a zone announcement effect) or an effect corresponding to the specific effect that is executed only by the target change may be determined when determining the effect in the change.

(4)
As shown in S711 and S712 in FIG. 26, the look-ahead effect including the zone notice effect has the first hold memory in which the look-ahead effect has not been determined, and the first hold memory number for which the look-ahead effect execution is not set is two. It can be executed on condition that the above is satisfied. On the other hand, in the zone announcement effect, it is determined whether or not there is a first hold memory for performing the super reach effect, and when there is no first hold memory for performing the super reach effect, the zone announcement effect can be executed. You may do so. Also, a pre-reading effect other than the zone announcement effect may be made executable when there is no first hold storage for performing the super reach effect. Further, although the prefetch determination is performed only for the first hold storage, the prefetch determination may be performed for the second hold storage, or the prefetch determination may be performed for both the first hold storage and the second hold storage. .

  (5) The predetermined effect executed during the zone announcement effect is a BGM effect, but may be another effect. For example, it may be another sound such as a sound emitted from a character other than BGM, or may be a predetermined image display. The production accessory 60 may be operated. When activating the special effect object 60, a tilting operation may be performed, or another operation may be performed. In addition, the effect accessory 60 may be an accessory of another aspect, and may be operated in a plurality of stages such as two stages, three stages, and the like. Alternatively, a lamp effect using a lamp may be used, or the handle 5 (see FIG. 1) may be vibrated, or an air discharge hole may be formed in the handle 5 or the glass door frame 2 to discharge air from the air discharge hole. Or you may. Further, an effect combining these effects may be set as the predetermined effect.

(6)
In the reach effect, a normal reach effect and a super reach effect are set, but more reach effects may be set. Also, a plurality of types of reach effects may be set for one or both of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. Further, only one type of reach effect may be provided. Further, the reach effect may be executed in a mode other than displaying on the effect display device 9. For example, the reach effect may be executed by operating the effect accessory 60, or the reach effect may be executed by voice, the above-described vibration, air, or the like. Further, a dot display, a drum display, or the like may be provided, and a reach effect may be performed using the dot display or the drum display.

  (7) In the zone announcement effect, the reach effect, and the BGM effect, the contents determined by the effect control CPU 101 are executed. It may be. Further, when the effect content differs depending on whether the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 is operated, a promotion notification for promoting the operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 may be given to the player. For the promotion notification, a push button 120 or a stick controller 122 such as an image shown in FIG. 43D may be displayed on the effect display device 9 to display a character prompting an operation such as "press!" The operation of the push button 120 or the stick controller 122 may be prompted.

  (8) There are three types of BGM: normal BGM, zone BGM, and super BGM, but more types of BGM may be set. Here, for example, when developing from normal reach to super reach, BGM for normal reach may be developed to BGM for super reach. In this case, when the BGM for the normal reach and the BGM for the super reach are set, the BGM for the super super reach is further set, and when the production accessory 60 tilts during the super reach, the BGM for the super reach is set. Therefore, the BGM for super super reach may be used. Alternatively, when setting normal BGM, zone BGM, BGM for normal reach, and BGM for super reach, when transitioning from normal reach to super reach, switching from BGM for normal reach to BGM for super reach, If there is a tilting operation of the staging accessory 60 during the execution of the BGM, it may be switched to the super reach BGM. The timing for switching from the normal BGM to the zone BGM may be another timing. For example, when the zone announcement effect is executed, the BGM is switched from the normal BGM to the zone BGM, and while the zone announcement effect while the shutter is closed is executed, the zone BGM effect is executed, but the zone announcement effect when the shutter is closed. Is executed, the normal BGM effect is continuously executed, an image in which the shutter image is opened is displayed, and after the shift to the notice effect after the shutter is opened, the BGM is switched from the normal BGM to the zone BGM. You may.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 19B, the zone effect display layer for displaying the shutter image is the second highest priority display layer among the display layers shown in FIG. 19B. Alternatively, a display layer having another priority may be used. Specifically, the display layer may be arranged to be the display layer with the highest priority, or may be arranged to be the display layer with the third or lower priority. When the zone effect display layer is not arranged at the position where the display layer has the highest priority, the error image display layer displaying the error images shown in FIGS. 43 (D1) and (D2) has the highest priority. May be arranged. The adjustment result image R shown in FIG. 43A may be displayed on a display layer having a higher priority than the zone effect display layer on which the zone announcement effect is executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 19B, the small symbol image 300A is displayed at a position before the shutter image 300S during the shutter closing zone announcement effect, but is displayed at times other than the shutter closing zone announcement effect. For example, it may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed when the left decorative symbol 5L, the middle decorative symbol 5C, and the right decorative symbol 5R are performing variable display. Or may be displayed only at times other than super reach. Further, although the reserved image H is displayed in the small symbol display area, it may be displayed in another display area, for example, a change effect display layer shown in FIG. 19B. In this case, when the shutter image 300S is displayed, the hold image H may be hidden by the shutter image 300S. Therefore, when the reserved image H is hidden by the shutter image 300S, an auxiliary reserved image for supplementarily displaying the reserved number corresponding to the reserved image H may be displayed in the small symbol display area.

  (10) An example of displaying the pre-reading notification by displaying characters is not limited to the telop display mode. A specific character image is displayed, and the character “pre-reading” is displayed as a line of the character image. You may do so. A display area for displaying various messages such as game information may be provided in a part of the effect display device 9, and the text “pre-reading” may be displayed in the message display area.

  (11) As the image of the pre-reading notice described above, an image provided separately from the image of the pre-reading effect such as the image of the chance eye notice effect, the image of the background change notice effect, and the image of the hold change notice effect is displayed. Examples have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As the image of the prefetching notification, the image of the prefetching effect is included in the image of each prefetching effect, and is displayed as a part of the image of the prefetching effect when displaying the image of the prefetching effect. Is also good.

  (12) As the image of the pre-reading notification described above, an example has been described in which the effect of the pre-reading notification is completely common for a plurality of types of pre-reading effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the image of the pre-reading notification, a plurality of types of images having different character colors, and images having different character sizes and the like in some common modes are provided and selectable, and pre-reading is performed. It may be possible to display an image in a common mode that is partially different depending on the type of effect.

  (13) As the prefetching notification described above, an example in which the common prefetching notification is executed for all prefetching effects has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For a predetermined prefetching effect (for example, an effect that can be clearly recognized from the effect contents as a prefetching effect), a prefetching operation in a mode different from the common mode prefetching notification is performed. The middle notification may be executed.

  (14) The example in which the pre-reading notification is ended during the fluctuation display after the one-time pre-reading determination target when the pre-reading notification is ended has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading notification may be ended during the fluctuation display after the pre-read determination target two or more times.

  (15) As an example of terminating the prefetching notification in the variable display after one time of the prefetching determination target when terminating the prefetching notification, it indicates that a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display. Was. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As an example of ending the pre-reading notification in the fluctuation display after one pre-fetch determination target, the timing at which the first symbol stops or the timing at which the reach state occurs in the fluctuation display The pre-reading notification may be ended at a predetermined effect execution timing in the variation pattern of the variation display, such as (timing at which two symbols stop).

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, there has been described an example in which, when performing various prefetching effects, an effect of always executing the common prefetching notification is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is determined that various prefetch effects are to be executed, it is determined at a selection ratio set to a predetermined ratio of less than 100% whether or not to execute the common mode prefetching notification. However, the pre-reading notification in a common mode may be performed only when the execution of the pre-reading notification is selected.

  (17) Please disclose that the effect of changing the color of the corner of the display surface of the effect display device 9 may be changed as the effect of the pre-reading notice shown in the above-described embodiment by using an image such as an effect image. . In addition, an effect of causing a specific lamp (light emitting means) provided on the game board or the game frame to emit light may be executed. May also be used).

  (18) The end timing of the pre-reading notification in the above-described embodiment is not limited to the above-described timing, and may be before the fluctuation display of the pre-read determination target (for example, the first change display of the pre-read determination target). Other timings, such as at the end of the variable display of the target, at the start of the variable display of the prefetch determination target, during the execution of the variable display of the prefetch determination target (for example, when reach is established), and at the end of the variable display of the prefetch determination target May be used.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25 (D2), for the pre-reading notification, an effect of terminating the pre-reading notification after the end, not at the end of the variable display of the pre-read determination target, is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a function, as a pre-reading notification, a notification in a different presentation mode may be provided without a common mode notification in a plurality of types of pre-reading effects. For example, when the degree of expectation for the big hit is the same depending on the type of the look-ahead effect, predetermined notification of different effect modes may be executed in accordance with the type of the look-ahead effect. In addition, when the degree of expectation for the jackpot differs depending on the type of the look-ahead effect, predetermined notification of an effect mode different according to the degree of expectation of the jackpot corresponding to each look-ahead effect may be executed.

  (20) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the prefetch effect is not executed when the number of pending storages is not two or more. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect may be executed even when the number of reserved storages is not two or more.

  (21) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the effect control microcomputer 100 makes a selection decision to execute a prefetch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and such a selection decision is made on the game control microcomputer 560 side, and data that can specify the decision result is sent to the effect control microcomputer 100 by the effect control command, and the effect control microcomputer The computer 100 may perform the control in accordance with the effect control command.

  (22) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probable change state), a time saving state, and a high base state may be included as advantageous states that are advantageous to the player. The advantageous state is a state in which one or more types are combined from other advantageous states such as a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state (probable state), a time saving state, and a high base state. Is also good.

  (23) In the embodiment described above, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer of a fluctuation pattern indicating a fluctuation mode such as a fluctuation time, a type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-run, one time when the fluctuation is started, Although the example in which the variation pattern command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer using two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a sliding effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the stop is transmitted, and the second command is used to indicate the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. A command indicating the fluctuating time or the fluctuating mode (after) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform the effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the microcomputer for game control notifies the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and the specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing is selected by the microcomputer for effect control. Is also good. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this manner, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced. Thus, in the configuration in which the variation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer using two commands, in the second command after transmitting the first command, the display result of the prize-winning effect process is determined in the second command, Alternatively, prefetch determination information such as a variation pattern type may be transmitted, and an effect of a prefetch notice may be executed based on the reception of the second command.

  (24) The embodiments described above can also be applied to devices such as game machines that simulate the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The programs and data for realizing the above-described embodiments are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like by a removable recording medium, but may be stored in a storage device of the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by pre-installing it on the server. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter. The embodiment of the game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  (25) In the present embodiment, a gaming machine has been described in which a game medium is paid out to a player's hand in accordance with the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed gaming machine that adds gaming points (scores) without paying out at hand may be employed. In the enclosed gaming machine, a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls as an example of a game medium in the gaming machine is formed, and a storage unit for storing a gaming point is provided, and according to a ball lending operation, The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit in accordance with the ball shooting operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit in accordance with the occurrence of the winning.

  (26) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case has been described in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the embodiment. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variably display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, variation display may be performed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. Also in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be something.

  (27) In the embodiment described above, a specific example of a predetermined value exceeding 0% has been described as the “ratio (ratio, probability)”. However, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence ratio of the predetermined gaming state 1 and the occurrence ratio of the other gaming state 2 in the predetermined gaming period are compared, and it is determined that “one occurrence ratio is higher than the other occurrence ratio”, This also includes the case where the occurrence ratio of one game state is 0%.

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, after the fluctuation display result when the display result of the fluctuation display is determined to be the probability change big hit is derived and displayed, after the big hit game state ends, the change state is unconditionally changed to the probability change state. An example of controlled probabilistic state control is given. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the detecting means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 20, the control device is controlled to a probable change state. Type-variable state control may be performed.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below, as well as changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each of the modifications, and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiments and each of the modifications, all or some of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be noted that the embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all aspects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

In addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a pachinko gaming machine 901 that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player. Etc.)
A specific effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 101 or the like) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a zone notice effect or the like) indicating a shift to the advantageous state over a plurality of changes;
Predetermined effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 101, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of predetermined effects different from each other (for example, a BGM effect such as a normal BGM effect, a zone BGM effect, a super BGM effect, etc.);
A notification effect (for example, a CPU 101 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing an information effect (for example, a reach effect such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect) of whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state;
Special display means for performing a special display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing a special display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game;
With
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period elapses after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, the display of the icon as the special display is changed). The special display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, an icon is displayed (the special display changes, etc.),
The special notification executing means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, it is notified that an icon as the special display is displayed). Abnormal notification is also possible within a predetermined period after
The predetermined effect execution means,
In response to the execution of the specific effect, execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started (for example, a zone BGM effect is executed when a zone announcement effect is executed), and the specific effect is executed. The predetermined effect (for example, zone) corresponding to the specific effect according to the end of the notification effect executed after the effect (for example, the end of the super-reach effect executed after the zone notice effect is executed). A first pattern for ending the execution of the zone BGM effect corresponding to the notice effect (for example, ending the zone BGM effect in response to the end of the super reach effect executed after the zone notice effect is executed);
In response to the execution of the specific effect, execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started, and during the execution of the notification effect executed after the specific effect (for example, when a zone announcement effect is executed) In response to execution of a special effect (for example, a character effect in which the effecting character 60 performs a tilting operation) indicating that the state is shifted to the advantageous state during a super-reach effect performed after the execution, for example. A second pattern of changing the type of the predetermined effect (for example, switching the BGM effect output from the speaker 27 from the zone BGM effect to the super BGM effect). .

  According to the gaming machine, it can be emphasized that the degree of expectation of being controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher, and the interest can be improved. In addition, the game situation can be grasped even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the special display is notified to be changed, and a decrease in the game interest can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine, an effect accompanied by a special display and a special notification may be executed together with the specific effect. In addition, an effect accompanied by a special display and a special notification may be executed together with the predetermined effect. In addition, an effect accompanied by a special display and a special notification may be executed together with the notification effect. Furthermore, an effect with special display or special notification may be executed in only one of the first pattern and the second pattern, and an effect or special information with special display may not be executed in the other.

  In the gaming machine, when an effect or special notification with a special display is performed together with the specific effect, an effect or special notification with a special display may be performed in all of the plurality of variations in which the specific effect is performed, An effect accompanied by a special display or a special notification may be executed only in a specific change among a plurality of changes.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can grasp the gaming situation even during a predetermined period after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed, and prevent a decrease in gaming interest,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state,
Special display means for performing a special display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing a special display effect);
Special notification executing means (for example, effect control CPU 90120 for performing abnormality notification, etc.) capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period elapses after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, the display of the icon as the special display is changed). The special display change notification to be notified is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, an icon is displayed (the special display changes, etc.),
The special notification executing means can execute the special notification even during a predetermined period after the change of the display mode of the special display is notified (for example, it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed). Abnormal notification is also possible within a predetermined period after
A gaming machine characterized by the above. Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, an embodiment of another embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 45 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. The game board 902 has a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (to the right of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 45). Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, an LED (light emitting diode) of a 7-segment or dot matrix, and identifies each of them in a special figure game which is an example of a variable display game. Special symbols (also referred to as "special figures"), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information), are displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols including numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. I do. Note that the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. Instead, for example, it is only necessary that a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which combinations of lighting and extinguishing of the 7-segment LEDs are different are preset as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A symbol number corresponding to each of a plurality of types of special symbols is given. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. .

  Both the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are formed, for example, in a square shape. Note that the type of the first special map and the type of the second special map may be the same (for example, numbers indicating “0” to “9” and symbols indicating “−”), or the type may be different. It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B may each be configured to variably display, for example, numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating “00” to “99”. .

  An image display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 902. The image display device 905 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The display area of the image display device 905 corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B in the special figure game. For example, in a decorative design display area serving as a plurality of variable display units, for example, three, a decorative design which is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) each of which can be identified is variably displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 905. Then, in the special figure game, in response to the start of one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, In the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right", the change of the decorative design (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 905. Then, the fixed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display apparatus 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display apparatus 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols, each of which is identifiable, are variably displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern as a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derived"). Deriving and displaying various display symbols, such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol, means stopping the identification information of the decorative symbol or the like (also referred to as complete stop display or final stop display) and terminating the variable display. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation and display of the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes “0” and the decorative symbol becomes “0”. The design may be stopped and displayed, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking, expansion and contraction, and the like. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not steadily displayed, the player can recognize that the fluctuation of the decorative symbol due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. Becomes Note that the temporary stop display may include, for example, completely displaying the decorative symbol for a shorter time than a predetermined time (for example, one second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters). Numbers, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers and characters or symbols and character images may be used, and character images are, for example, people or animals, objects other than these, or , A symbol such as a character, or any other decorative image indicating an arbitrary figure). Each of the decorative symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers "1" to "8" are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8", respectively. The number of decorative patterns is not limited to eight, but may be any number (for example, seven or nine) as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination and a lossy combination can be configured.

  After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "medium", and "right" are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the display, for example, a scroll display is performed in which the symbol numbers sequentially flow from the top to the bottom from the smallest one to the largest one, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, Thus, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L, etc.), scroll display is performed from a symbol with a large symbol number to a symbol with a small symbol number. When the decorative symbol having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be subsequently displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is arranged. In the start winning prize storage display area 905H, a hold storage display is performed in which the number of variable display holds (number of special figure hold storages) corresponding to the special figure game can be specified. Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning prize ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning prize ball device 906B. This occurs based on a start winning prize by (entering). That is, a start condition (also referred to as an “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit game state, when the start condition allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  In the example shown in FIG. 45, the first holding for displaying the number of special figure reserved storages in the upper part of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning storage storage display area 905H. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first reservation display 9025A displays the first special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The second reservation display 9025B displays the second special figure reservation storage number in a identifiable manner. The first special figure reserved storage number is the number of memories in which execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. The second special figure reserved storage number is the number of storages in which execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. The variable display reserved storage number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number is particularly also referred to as a total reserved storage number. The term “number of special figure reservation storages” generally refers to a concept including all of the first special figure reservation storage number, the second special figure reservation storage number, and the total reservation storage number. (The concept includes the number of the first special figure reserved storages and the number of the second special figure reserved storages, but excludes the total number of reserved storages).

  Below the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first starting winning port as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. An ordinary variable winning ball device 906B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that change between a normal open state at a vertical position and an enlarged open state at a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning port.

  As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 906B, the game sphere passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the ordinary variable winning prize ball device 906B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( Into an open state where it is easy to enter. Note that, even when the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B is in the normally open state, although the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening, it is more likely that the gaming ball enters than in the enlarged opening state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B may be configured such that, in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning port, the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area has an enlarged open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), and a normal open state in which the game balls hardly pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). Changes to

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting port switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first starting port switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved storage number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) If not, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second starting port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved storage number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) If not, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the first start port switch 9022A and the number of prize balls paid out based on the detection of a game ball by the second start port switch 9022B May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 46, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through (enters) the special winning opening. Disable it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball passes through the special winning opening (enters). ) In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes between an open state in which the game balls easily pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game balls cannot pass (enter), which is disadvantageous for the player. I do. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the special winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes (enter) the special winning opening may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the special winning opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of a game ball by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball device 907, the gaming ball passes through another winning opening, for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the special winning opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, the game balls can enter the special winning opening, and the first state is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball to the special winning opening to obtain the winning ball, and for the player to obtain the winning ball. The second state is disadvantageous.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 45), a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, a normal symbol display 9020 is composed of a first special symbol display device 904A and the first 2 LED or the like special symbol display device 904B as well as 7-segment or dot matrix, a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol Is displayed (variable display) in a variable manner. Such a variable display of ordinary symbols is called an ordinary game (also referred to as an ordinary game).

  Above the normal symbol display 9020, there is provided a general symbol hold display 9025C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose reserved storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the big winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. You may be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on detection of a game ball that has entered any of the general prize holes by a predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and a gaming effect lamp 909 is provided around the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal prize ball device 906A, the normal variable prize ball device 906B, the special variable prize ball device 907, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At a lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball as a game medium toward a game area is provided. For example, the hit ball operation handle adjusts the resilience of a game ball in accordance with the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by a player or the like. The hitting operation handle may be provided with a single-shot firing switch for stopping driving of a firing motor included in the hitting ball firing device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented out by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hit ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, there is provided a lower plate that holds (retains) excess balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be able to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  A stick controller 9031A, which can be held and tilted by a player, is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the near side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). I have. The stick controller 9031A includes an operation rod that is held by a player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position at which the index finger of the operator's hand is hooked when the player grips the operation rod). I have. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger or the like) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 9031A with an operation hand (for example, a left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised as follows. It is sufficient that a trigger sensor for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button or the like is built in the operation stick.

  It is sufficient that a tilt direction sensor unit that detects a tilt operation on the operation rod is provided in the lower portion of the stick controller 9031A, inside the main body of the lower plate, or the like. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmission-type photo sensors (parallel sensor Pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) that are arranged on the right side of the center position of the operation stick as viewed from the player and perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 902. What is necessary is just to be comprised including a photosensor.

  The member forming the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 9031B at a predetermined position on the near side of the upper surface of the upper plate main body (for example, above the stick controller 9031A) or the like, which allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. Is provided. The push button 9031B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. A push sensor that detects a player's operation performed on the push button 9031B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 9031B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the ordinary symbol display 9020 performs variable display of the ordinary symbol such that the game ball passing through the passage gate 9041 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. After the general symbol starting condition is satisfied, the general symbol display condition 9020 is set based on the general symbol starting condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol such as the end of the previous general symbol game. Is started.

  In the ordinary symbol game, after a variation of the ordinary symbol is started, when a predetermined time that is the ordinary symbol variation time elapses, the fixed ordinary symbol that is a variable display result of the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a fixed symbol other than the symbol per symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed symbol, the variable display result of the symbol is “Loss”. Become. In response to the result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol being “per-figure”, an enlarged opening control (tilt control) in which the movable wing of the electric tulip constituting the ordinary variable prize ball device 906B is at the inclined position is performed. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  After the first starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning port formed on the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by the first starting port switch 9022A shown in FIG. 46, for example, The special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is started based on the fact that the first start condition has been satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit game state, or the like. The second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball device 906B is detected by the second starting switch 9022B shown in FIG. Later, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is started based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, by ending the previous special figure game or the big hit game state.

  In the special figure game with the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol is performed when the variable display time as the special figure variation time elapses. Derived special symbols (results of special figure display) are displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, a "big hit" is obtained as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, a "small hit" is obtained as a predetermined display result. Also, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, "losing" is obtained.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round (also referred to as “round game”) advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the number of “3”, “5”, and “7” is a large hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the number of “2” is a small hit symbol. , A special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and a lost symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A is different from each symbol in the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special figure games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game and the special display result becomes "big hit", in the big hit game state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 907 is set to the predetermined upper limit time. The special winning opening is kept open in a period until a predetermined number of (for example, 10) winning balls are generated or a predetermined number of (for example, 10) winning balls are generated. As a result, a round in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is placed in a first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player is executed.

  The special winning opening door, which has the special winning opening opened during the execution of the round, receives game balls falling on the surface of the game board 902 and then closes the special winning opening, thereby providing a special variable winning ball device. 907 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15”). Note that, even before the number of round executions reaches the upper limit number, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball does not win the large winning opening). .

  Of the rounds in the jackpot game state, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is a relatively long time (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable prize ball device 907 to the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Among the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" to be the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are usually open round big hit symbols, and the number "5" Is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normally open big hit state) as a normal open round specific game state controlled after a normal open round big hit symbol is derived as a fixed special symbol in a special figure game, a special winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 907. The door opens the big winning opening in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) as a first period elapses or a period in which a predetermined number (for example, 10) winning balls are generated. By doing so, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 907 is changed to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player. The normally open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 907 is set in each round. The upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening) is shorter than the first period in the normal open big hit state (for example, 0). .1 second). In the short-term open jackpot state, the opening period of the special winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as in the normal open jackpot state. Alternatively, in the short open jackpot state, the number of rounds executed may be the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) in the normal open jackpot state.

  In such a short-term open jackpot state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of payouts (prize balls) are obtained if a game ball wins in the special winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (eg, 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot game state in which a payout (prize ball) cannot be substantially obtained. Note that the short-term open jackpot state is also referred to as a second specific game state.

  In addition, the big hit game state as the short-term open round specific game state is not limited to the one in which the open period of the big winning opening is shorter than the big hit game state as the normal open round specific game state. The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open-round specific game state, while the upper limit number of times (for example, two times) in which the special winning opening is opened in the short-time open round specific game state is set. The number may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. In other words, the big hit gaming state as the short-term open round specific game state is such that the period during which the gaming ball easily passes (enters) the special winning opening in each round is changed from the first period in the normal open round specific game state. The second period is also short, and the number of rounds executed is at least one of the second round number smaller than the first round number in the normal open round specific game state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled as the special game state. In the small hitting game state, a variable winning operation is performed in the special variable winning ball device 907 to change the big winning opening to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player, as in the short-term open big hit state. That is, in the small hitting game state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display apparatus 904A is provided. In response to the start of any special figure game among the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. A period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display by the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may become a predetermined reach state.

  Here, the reach state is a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the big hit combination (“reach variation symbol”). ) Is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuing, or a display state in which all or a part of the decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously while forming all or a part of the big hit combination. Specifically, some of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" (for example, the decorative pattern display areas 905L and 905R of "left" and "right") are previously set. When a decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol indicating an alphanumeric character of "7") constituting a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) which has not been stopped and displayed yet. In the symbol display area 905C, etc.), the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or a part of the “left”, “medium”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R. This is a display state in which all or a part of the combination is synchronized and fluctuates.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the fluctuating speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (a performance image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. By changing the display mode of the background image, playing back and displaying a moving image different from the decorative symbol, or changing the variation mode of the decorative symbol, a rendering operation different from that before the reach state is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation as display of a character image, change of a display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change of a change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply, reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, and the lighting operation (flashing operation) of the luminous body such as the game effect lamp 909 are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each of the reach modes has a different possibility of being a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability"). That is, the possibility that the variable display result is a "big hit" can be varied depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed.

  As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach and super reach are set in advance. Then, when the reach mode of the super reach appears, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” (big hit expectation) becomes higher than when the reach mode of the normal reach appears.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in the reach state, the variable display result may be "big hit", etc. In some cases, a variable display effect for notifying a player is performed in a variable display mode of a decorative symbol or the like. In this embodiment, a variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo ream” can be executed. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effects of “slip” and “pseudo-sequence” in response to a change pattern being determined on the main substrate 9011 side. Note that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is performed on the effect control substrate 9012 may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate 9011 side.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left,” “middle,” and “right,” and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R, etc., a predetermined number (eg, “1” or “2”) of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol display areas is displayed. )) (For example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R), and then stop display after changing the decorative symbol again. Then, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. In this way, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the final decorative symbol as a variable display result, and then a predetermined number of symbols are displayed. By executing the variable display again for the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol, when the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state, and when the decorative symbol forming the non-reach combination without being in the reach state is stopped and displayed. is there.

  In the variable display effect of the “pseudo ream”, in response to one of the first and second start conditions of the special figure game being established once, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Until the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed (re-changed) again in all the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of times of the pseudo-run variation in this embodiment is “left”, “middle”, “right”, excluding the initial variation from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the temporary stop of all decorative symbols for the first time. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R.

  In the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, for example, one of a plurality of types of predetermined pseudo ream chances in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Is temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result, and thereafter, the variable display (re-change) is performed again. The pseudo consecutive chances may include a decorative symbol combination that is a predetermined non-reach combination instead of the decorative symbol variable display mode being the reach mode. Further, the pseudo consecutive chances may include a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a predetermined reach-loss combination (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “reach combination”) after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. For example, a decorative symbol (middle symbol) stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C among the pseudo consecutive chances is replaced with a special decorative symbol (pseudo continuous chance symbol) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative symbol in normal times. ). Among the decorative symbols that are also used in the variable display of the decorative symbols during normal times, a pseudo consecutive chance symbol that becomes a pseudo consecutive chance when stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C may be included. .

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of "pseudo-run", the re-variation (pseudo-run fluctuation) is performed, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the decorative symbol is displayed. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display was started several times in succession. In the variable display effect of “pseudo-ream” in this embodiment, re-variation (pseudo-repeate fluctuation) is to be performed at most once for easy understanding. May be executed up to more than one time, for example, two or three times. In the variable display of the “pseudo series” according to the present embodiment, the pseudo display that temporarily changes the display after the temporary stop display is performed (that is, whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance is temporarily stopped and displayed). A rendition production is performed. More specifically, in the pseudo-rendition effect, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-rendition chance symbol is displayed (the pseudo-rendition chance common to the success and failure effects described later). A symbol is displayed), and an effect is performed to inspire whether or not the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. A mode in which the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as a successful effect, and a mode in which the temporary consecutive display is not performed is referred to as a failed effect. As described above, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-run” in this embodiment, since the re-variation is performed at most once, the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-run which does not re-perform is re-performed. It is a fluctuating pattern of gaseousness that only exacerbates the fact (referred to as a fluctuating pattern of pseudo-fuzzy gaseous), and if a variable display effect of “pseudo-repeating” is performed based on the fluctuating pattern, a failure effect is performed. Become. In addition, instead of stopping and displaying a special decorative symbol such as a pseudo-rendition chance symbol in the pseudo-rendition production effect, or in conjunction with the stop display of the special decorative symbol, the variable display of the “pseudo-ren” variable display effect (first variation) ) May be controlled so that a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 (displayed as a common introduction effect).

  As the variable display effects using such a variable display operation of the decorative pattern, in addition to “slip” and “pseudo-ream”, for example, “development chance eyes”, “development chance eyes end”, “slide after stopping chance eyes” Such as various effect operations may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of the “development chance eyes”, “left”, “middle”, “right” after the decorative display of the decorative symbol is started and before the fixed decorative symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbols is reached. A predetermined reach effect is started. Thereby, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes a reach state, and the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the reach state is reached. Expectation is raised.

  In addition, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity eyes”, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are all displayed. In addition, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern of a combination predetermined as a development chance eye is derived and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of "slip after chance stop", similarly to the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the fixed decorative symbol which is the variable display result. , Temporarily stop displaying the decorative pattern of the loss combination (special combination) which becomes the pseudo consecutive chance in all the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo ream" in which the decorative symbols are changed again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, the decorative symbols are changed again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not become the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In some cases, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a fixed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Corresponding to this, after the reach effect is executed, or without the reach effect, the fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined reach-loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative pattern is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach loss”) when the variable display result is “loss”.

  Among the special symbols that are usually open round big hit symbols, the special big symbols such as the special symbol showing the number "3" and the variable big hits symbol such as the special symbol showing the number "7" are stopped as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game. When displayed, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol having reached the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect has been executed, or without performing the reach effect, a plurality of types of big hit combinations Among them, the fixed decoration symbol which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative symbols to be a big hit combination are, for example, symbol numbers “1” to “5” which are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R on the image display device 905. Any one of the decorative symbols “8” is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Anything should do.

  After the finalized decorative symbol to be the jackpot combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the predetermined round in the jackpot game state, whether or not to control to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the probability change is given as a privilege) No.), a bonus promotion effect that is a bonus giving effect is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot medium promotion effect, for example, a battle effect in which characters fight each other in the display area of the image display device 905 may be performed. Then, the player may be notified so as to be able to recognize the presence or absence of the promotion to be the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state (whether or not the probable change is given as a privilege) due to the victory or defeat of the main character. Note that the jackpot medium promotion effect is not during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, but during the start of the jackpot gaming state or the period from the end of any round in the jackpot gaming state until the next round starts, The game may be performed in a period from the end of the last round in the big hit game state to the start of the next variable display game. In addition, the promotion process during the big hit may be executed during the first variable display game after the big hit game state ends. In the big hit game state, the medium-sized jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the last round is completed may be particularly referred to as an “ending promotion effect”.

  In the jackpot medium promotion effect, it is notified that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is in a certain state (informs that a privilege is given). There is a promotion (notifying that no privilege is given) during a jackpot promotion failure. Then, when the jackpot medium promotion success effect is executed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to the probable change state. On the other hand, when the promotion failure effect during the big hit is performed, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is not controlled to the positive change state (non-probable change state), but is controlled to the time saving state. In the probable change state, in the variable display of each special figure game or decoration symbol, the probability that the variable display result is "big hit" and the game is controlled to the big hit game state is improved so as to be higher than the normal state and the time saving state. . Such a probable change state continues irrespective of the number of executions of the special figure game until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. The time reduction state is a gaming state in which the special symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state different from a specific game state such as a jackpot game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). The same control is performed as in the state in which is executed. Such a time saving state is when a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and when a variable display result is “big hit”, one of the conditions is satisfied first. finish.

  In the probable change state or the time saving state, control is performed by the normal symbol display 9020 to shorten the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary symbol game, or the variable of the ordinary symbol in each ordinary game is performed. Control to increase the probability that the display result is "per-figure" as compared to the normal state, and tilt control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable prize ball device 906B based on the fact that the variable display result is "per-figure". The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, for example, by making the tilt control time for performing the control longer than in the normal state, or by increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied is performed. In the probable change state or the time saving state, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that is advantageous to the player by making it easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening in the probable change state or the time saving state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency of the second start winning opening being in the enlarged opening state is increased as compared to when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B becomes easy to be satisfied, and the special figure game can be frequently executed. The time required for the variable display result to become a "big hit" is reduced. Therefore, in the probable change state or the time saving state, it is easy to be in the big hit game state as compared with the normal state (the game state is advantageous for the player). The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to be either the probable change state or the time saving state. . Also, during the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base state. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is also said that the gaming state is in the low base state. The time reduction state in this embodiment is a game state also called a low-probability high base state, and the normal state is a game state also called a low-probability low base state. The probability change state is a game state also called a high probability and high base state. That is, when the successful promotion during the jackpot is performed, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be in a stable state, so that the gaming state is controlled to be in a highly accurate and high base state. On the other hand, when the promotion failure during the jackpot is performed, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is not controlled to the probable change state (non-probable change state), but is controlled to the time saving state. The state will be controlled.

  The probable change state may include a state in which time saving control and high opening control are performed together with the probable change control, and a state in which only probable change control is performed and time saving control and high opening control are not performed may be included. As an example, after the end of the 15-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special map game is “probable change big hit”, the first certain change state (high accuracy high state) in which time saving control and high opening control are performed together with the certain change control. Base state). Thereafter, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100) without the special figure display result becoming “big hit”, although the certainty change control is continuously performed, the time saving control and the high opening control are performed. May be controlled to a second probable change state (also referred to as a high-probability low-base state) that is not performed after the completion of the operation. In addition, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “spot probability big hit” in the special state game, the state shifts to the second probability change state after the end of the two round big hit state, and only the probability change control is performed. However, the time saving control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, when the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game has become “probable big hit” in the probability change state or the time saving state is changed to the first certain change state, Time saving control and high opening control may be performed together with the probable change control. Alternatively, after the end of the 15-round jackpot state based on the “probable jackpot”, the state is controlled again to the first probable state until the special figure display result becomes “jackpot”, while the two round jackpot state based on the “probable jackpot” is returned. After the end, the state shifts to the first probability change state, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the special figure display result becoming “big hit”, the state shifts to the second probability change state. You may. The time-saving control and the high-opening control are started and finished at the same time (in conjunction), while the start and end of the time-varying control are not necessarily linked with the start and the end of the time-saving control and the high-opening control. You may.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a case where a short opening round big hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "5" is stopped and displayed, or a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed. In such a case, any of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed without changing the decorative display variable display state to the reach state. In addition, when the short open round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. For example, after completion, a fixed decorative symbol (a fixed decorative symbol serving as an opportunity corresponding to the state of the short-time open round big hit) which is a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  In response to the fixed special symbol in the special figure game being a short-term open round big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed is the case where the variable display result is "big hit". This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "striking" (also referred to as "striking big hit" or "suddenly changing big hit"). Based on the fact that the variable display result has been "big hit" for the "big hit" big hit type, the short-term open big hit state may be controlled.

  As a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, a small hit symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed, and based on the variable display result being "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the variable display result becomes "small hit". However, when the special figure game in which the variable display result is “small hit” is executed, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special game state has reached a predetermined number, after the end of the small hit game state, The special game state may end and return to the normal state.

  If the special winning symbol that constitutes the opening chance eye is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, and the special winning opening is in the open state, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “stochastic”. Based on this, there is a case where the state is controlled to the short-term open big hit state and a case where the variable display result is controlled to the small hitting game state based on “small hit”. On the other hand, the reason why the special winning symbol is opened after the determined decorative symbol constituting the reach combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol is that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "surprise". Only when the state is controlled to the short-term open jackpot state based on this. Accordingly, the fixed decorative symbol constituting the opening chance eye corresponds to being controlled to either the short-term open big hit state or the small hit game state, while the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is in the short-term open big hit state. Corresponding to being controlled.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, a sound control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 46 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also has a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the gaming board 902 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly addressed to a function of setting random numbers used in the special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 9012 and the like. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. The main board 9011 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 9020 by controlling the turning on / off / coloring of the ordinary symbol display 9020, etc. It also has a control function.

  The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 which takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits the signals to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and displays an image display device 905, speakers 908 L, 908 R. And various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electric components such as the game effect lamp 909. That is, the effect control board 9012 performs effects such as all or a part of the display operation on the image display device 905, all or a part of the sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, and all or a part of the on / off operation of the game effect lamp 909 or the like. Function for determining the control content for causing the electrical component for execution to perform a predetermined effect operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and outputs sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. And a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing for the purpose. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the main board 9011 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. Note that the gate switch 9021, the first starting port switch 9022A, the second starting port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. The main board 9011 also has a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display device 9020, a first reservation display device 9025A, a second reservation display device 9025B, and a general diagram reservation display 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as display control is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909. And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 that stores a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a game control program and performing a control operation, and updating numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 90103 It is provided with a random number circuit 90104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, when the CPU 90103 executes the program read from the ROM 90101, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is executed. At this time, the CPU 90103 reads the fixed data from the ROM 90101, reads the fixed data, the CPU 90103 writes the variable data in the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores the variable data, and the CPU 90103 reads the variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102. The CPU 90103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, the CPU 90103 sends the signal to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  The random number circuit 90104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of various random numbers used for controlling the progress of the game. The CPU 90103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example, to periodically or irregularly update various numerical data by software, so that a part of various random numbers is May be counted. The software executed by the CPU 90103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 90104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 90104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 90101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 9011 and a fluctuation pattern table storing a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 47 shows a fluctuation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable design mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively, Of the cases where the display result is "big hit", when the big hit type is "non-probable" or "probable" and "sudden", and when the variable display result is "small hit", etc. Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. Note that the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss”. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the small hit variation pattern are included in the hit variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The super reach variation pattern includes a reach effect in a super reach A or super reach B mode, regardless of whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "losing". In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which a variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is performed in a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or a case where the variable display result is “losing”. However, the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” may be performed also when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “shock” or when the variable display result is “small hit”. Further, the variation pattern in which the variable display effect of “pseudo ream” is performed is an example of a super reach variation pattern, but may be a normal reach variation pattern or a non-reach variation pattern. Similarly, for the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous gasket, there are cases where the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or when the variable display result is "small hit", there is a case of normal reach or non-reach. Is also good. Further, as described above, the illustrated example shows an example in which the pseudo-run fluctuation is at most one time, but there is a fluctuation pattern that can be executed up to more than one time, for example, two times or three times. You may. Also, a variable display effect such as “slip” or “pseudo ream” may be performed in the other variation patterns shown.

  The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 46 may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 901 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 90102 is preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the backup power supply capacitor). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. The RAM 90102 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like.

  An I / O 90105 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 90100, and an I / O 90105 for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100. And an output port.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 90120. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905, and a random number that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 90120 A circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 90121, and thereby a process for controlling the effect operation by the electric components for effect is executed. At this time, effect control CPU 90120 reads fixed data from ROM 90121, fixed data read operation, effect control CPU 90120 writes variable data in RAM 90122 and temporarily stores the variable data, and effect control CPU 90120 stores data in RAM 90122. A variation data reading operation for reading various variation data temporarily stored, a reception operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 receives input of various signals from outside the effect control board 9012 via the I / O 90125, and an effect control CPU 90120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via the O90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, ROM 90121, and RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  The effect control board 9012 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the audio control board 9013, Wiring or the like for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 9014. Further, on the effect control board 9012, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the stick controller 9031A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 9035A, and a game for the push button 9031B are provided. Wiring for transmitting, from the push sensor 9035B, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a user's operation has been detected is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such a production operation is also referred to as a production random number.

  In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 46, in addition to the effect control program, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation are stored. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 90120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data forming a determination table, and pattern data configuring various effect control patterns. It is remembered.

  As an example, in the ROM 90121, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the effect operation by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED, the effect model, and the like). An effect control pattern table storing a plurality of types of effect control patterns to be used is stored. The effect control pattern is composed of data and the like indicating control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. The effect control pattern table only needs to store, for example, a special figure change effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns.

  The special figure change effect control pattern is a period corresponding to a plurality of kinds of change patterns, during a period from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the special figure display result. It consists of data showing the control contents of various effecting operations such as variable display operation of decorative design, reach effect, effect display operation in re-lottery effect, etc., or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbol. Have been. The announcement effect control pattern is configured by data indicating control contents of an effect operation which is an announcement effect executed in response to an announcement pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and include data indicating control contents thereof. The special figure change effect control patterns may include, for example, a plurality of types of reach effect control patterns in which the effect mode in each reach effect is different for each change pattern for executing the reach effect.

  The effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern (effect control pattern at the time of a special figure change) based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, when starting a variable display of a decorative symbol. The effect control CPU 90120 sets a corresponding effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern) when, for example, starting execution of a predetermined suggestive effect such as a notice effect. Here, when setting an effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, or the effect control pattern may be configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the read position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may simply be specified. A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from effect control CPU 90120 to display control unit 90123, sound control board 9013, and the like. In the display control unit 90123 which has received the instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores it in a VRAM. In the voice control board 9013 which receives the instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. . Thereafter, each time the effect control process timer value is updated, a determination is made as to whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values have been met. Control.

  The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 is provided with an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.

  In the main board 9011, when the power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, a register of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is set. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, every 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process. When the initialization is completed, an interrupt is permitted, and then a loop process is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count The state of a detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901 are output (step). S9013).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a portion of the game random numbers MR1 'to MR3' used on the main board 9011 side by software is executed (step S9014). After that, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S9016). The CPU 90103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 9020 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable operation of the normal variable prize ball device 906B. Enables setting of tilting motion of wing pieces.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 90105, the effect control board 9012 is output to the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 90102. After the control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit an effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After the command control process is executed, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated after the interrupt control is set.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process performed in step S9015 of FIG. In the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 49, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90101 in FIG. 49 as the start winning determination processing.

  In the start winning prize determination process shown in FIG. 50, the CPU 90103 firstly performs the first prize opening based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 906A. It is determined whether the starting port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). At this time, if the first starting port switch 9022A is on (step S90201; Yes), the first special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved figure number of the special figure game using the first special figure, is equal to a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the maximum storage number) (step S90202). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. If the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90202 (step S90202; No), for example, the storage value of the starting port buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to “1” (step S90203).

  When the first starting port switch 9022A is turned off in step S90201 (step S90201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number has reached the upper limit in step S90202 (step S90202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second starting port switch 9022B is ON based on a detection signal from the second starting port switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 906B ( Step S90204). At this time, if the second starting port switch 9022B is on (step S90204; Yes), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved figure number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is equal to the predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S90205). The CPU 90103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, for example. If the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S90205 (step S90205; No), for example, the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the RAM 90102 is set to “2” (step S90206).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S90203 and S90206, the update is performed so as to add 1 to the special figure reserved storage number corresponding to the startup buffer value which is the storage value of the startup buffer (step S90207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved storage number count value is incremented by one. In this manner, the first reserved storage number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved stored number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning port and the second starting condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to add 1 (step S90208). For example, the count value of the total reserved storage number, which is the storage value of the total reserved storage number counter provided in the RAM 90102, may be updated so as to be incremented by one.

  After executing the process of step S90208, the CPU 90103 selects the random number value MR1 'for determining the special figure display result or the random number value for determining the jackpot type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 90104 and the random counter of the RAM 90102. Numerical data indicating MR2 'is extracted (step S90209). The random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result is determined as to whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state and to set the variable display result as a “small hit”. It is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the hitting game state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example. The random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is "big hit", to one of "non-probable", "probable", and "probable". For example, the random number is used to take a value in a range from “0” to “99”. By executing the processing of step S90209, the CPU 90103 outputs numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display result including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. Extract. In this embodiment, the random number value MR1 'and the random number value MR2' are extracted in the process of step S90209, but as described above, the random number value MR2 'is used to determine the jackpot type. Since it is a random value, it may be extracted only when the determination result of the random value MR1 ′ is “big hit”. Note that in this case, the random number value MR2 'may be extracted after it is determined to be Yes in step S90241 of FIG.

  The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as suspension information at the head of an empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the starting port buffer value (step S90210). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ is set in the first special figure holding storage unit 90151A as shown in FIG. When the mouth buffer value is “2”, numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 ′ and MR2 ′ is set in the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B as shown in FIG. 51B.

  In the first special figure holding storage unit 90151A shown in FIG. 51A, a game ball passes (enters) a first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 906A, and a start winning (first start winning) is generated. The suspended data of the special figure game that has been started but not yet started (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit 90151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the holding number in the first starting winning opening and associates the holding number with the first starting condition in the passing (entering) of the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 extracts, from the random number circuit 90104 or the like, the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result or the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, as reserved data, and the stored number is predetermined. Until it reaches the upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit 90151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In the second special figure holding storage unit 90151B shown in FIG. 51 (B), the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B, and the starting winning (second starting winning) is obtained. The reservation data of the special figure game that has occurred but has not been started yet (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B) is stored. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit 90151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) with the holding number in the second starting winning opening and associates the holding ball with the holding number to determine the second starting condition in passing (entering) the game ball. Based on the establishment, the CPU 90103 extracts, from the random number circuit 90104 and the like, the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result or the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type, and the like, as reserved data. The data is stored until the upper limit (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data thus stored in the second special figure storage unit 90151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (the special figure display) in this special figure game Based on the result, it becomes the suspension information that enables determination as to whether or not a predetermined game value is given.

  In addition, the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, the opening information indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90210 shown in FIG. 50, transmission setting of a start-up winning award designation command according to the start-up buffer value is performed (step S90211). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and so on. To transmit a first starting port winning designation command to notify 9012 that the first starting condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A has been satisfied. Make the settings for On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 90101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, for example, to the effect control board 9012. The setting for transmitting the second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B is established. . The starting port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process is completed.

  Then, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 90101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the first special figure reserved storage number is stored in the effect control board 9012. Is set to transmit either the first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the notification or the second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number (step S90212). The reserved storage number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, for example, by executing a predetermined command control process after the special symbol process process ends. Note that, in place of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) of the total reserved storage number may be used.

  After executing the processing of step S90212, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S90213). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step S90213; "1"), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step S90214), and then step S90204. Proceed to processing. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (Step S90213; “2”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (Step S90215). The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting port switch 9022A and the second starting port switch 9022B simultaneously detect a valid winning start of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

  After executing the start winning determination processing in step S90101 in FIG. 49, the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processing in steps S90110 to S90120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 90102.

  The special symbol normal process in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol are stored based on the presence / absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 90151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 90151B. The display device 904B determines whether or not to start the special figure game. In the special symbol normal processing, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special symbol display result, it is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”. Is decided (prior decision) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol or big hit symbol) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. A small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting processing, the variation is determined using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Processing for determining a pattern to be one of a plurality of types is included. The random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “1” to “1”. Take a value in the range of “251”. When the variable pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  By the special symbol normal process of step S90110 and the variation pattern setting process of step S90111, a variation pattern including a variable display time of a fixed special symbol, a special symbol, and a decoration symbol, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, is determined. That is, the special symbol normal process and the variation pattern setting process use the random number value MR1 'for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2' for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 'for determining the variation pattern. And a process for determining the variable display mode of the decorative pattern.

  The special symbol change process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. This special symbol change processing includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and a time elapsed since the special symbol started to change. And the like. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed, the special symbol variation timer value, which is a value stored in the special symbol variation timer provided in the RAM 90102, is subtracted by one or added by one, and the first special symbol display device is added. Regardless of whether the game is a special figure game using the first special figure in 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, the measurement of the elapsed time is performed by the common timer. Done. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol change process in step S90112 is performed by changing the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 904B. It is only necessary that the processing be such that the change of the special symbol in the special figure game using the figure is controlled by a common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop processing of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B stop the change of the special symbol, and stop display (derivation) of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The processing for making the setting for the execution is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is turned on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. Also, the special symbol stop process of step S90113 includes a process of determining the end of the time saving state, and performing a setting for transmitting a command notifying the end to the effect control board 9012 when the process is to be ended. (The command itself is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control processing described above).

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit". include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, or “probable”. As an example, in response to the jackpot type of “non-probable change” or “probable change”, the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”, and the maximum number of times the round is executed is set. By setting the number of times of opening of the mouth to “15 times”, the setting of the normal opening big hit state may be performed. On the other hand, the upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened is set to “0.1 seconds” in accordance with the jackpot type of “spot”, and the number of times the special winning opening is opened is the upper limit number of times the round is executed. May be set to "15 times" to set the short-term open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit opening processing in step S90115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during opening of the jackpot is based on a process of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and on the basis of the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 9023, and the like. For determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. . In addition, the processing during opening of the big hit in step S90115 includes processing for setting, in response to detection of a game ball by the count switch 9023, transmission of a prize ball command indicating that to the effect control board 9012 side. (The command itself is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 in the command control processing described above).

  The post-big hit release processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-big hit opening processing includes determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the special winning opening has reached the maximum value of the special winning opening and the maximum number of the special winning opening has been reached. In this case, a process for setting a big hit end designation command to be transmitted is included. When the number of times of execution of the round has not reached the maximum winning opening opening number, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end processing in step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is performed by the effect device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909. Includes processing to wait until the time elapses, and processing to perform various settings (start setting of the probable change state and the time saving state) for starting the probability change control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit game state. I have. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process for setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", similarly to when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "striking", the upper limit of the period in which the special winning opening is opened is set. The setting of the small hitting game state may be performed by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening the special winning opening to “15 times”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit opening processing in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end processing in step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end processing, the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is performed by the effect devices such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L and 908R, the game effect lamp 909, and the like. The process includes a process of waiting until the elapse. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 before the small hitting game state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S90110 of FIG. 49 as the special symbol normal processing. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 52, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S90231). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the process of step S90231, the second hold storage count value stored in the RAM 90102 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special figure reservation storages is other than “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; No), the reservation stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 90151B corresponding to the reservation number “1” Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type are read as data (step S90232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90232, the second special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved figure storage count, for example, by updating the second reserved figure storage count, and the second special figure reserved storage number. The hold data indicating the random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 90151B are higher by one entry (Step S90233). In the process of step S90233, the RAM 90102 may be updated so that the total reserved storage count counted by the total reserved storage counter is decremented by one. At this time, the variable special figure designating buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special figure designating buffer, is updated to “2” (step S90234).

  When the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” in step S90231 (step S90231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special figure reserved storage number is “0” (step S90235). The first special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. For example, in the process of step S90235, the first reserved storage number counter value stored in the first reserved storage number counter may be read from the RAM 90102, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved storage number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure starts to be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  Note that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be changed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and start winning is generated. In this case, a table is provided for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winning has occurred, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. What is necessary is just to be able to determine.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; No), the reservation stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 90151A corresponding to the reservation number “1” Numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 'for determining a special figure display result and a random number value MR2' for determining a jackpot type are read as data (step S90236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first special figure reserved storage number is updated by subtracting the first reserved figure count value by 1, and the like, and the first special figure reserved storage number is reduced by one. The hold data indicating the random numbers MR1 'and MR2' stored in the entries lower than the hold number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers "2" to "4") in the unit 90151A are shifted upward by one entry. The shift is performed (step S90237). In addition, in the process of step S90237, the RAM 90102 may be updated so that the total reserved storage count counted by the total reserved storage counter is decremented by one. At this time, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S90238).

  After executing any one of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, a change table is used as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is “big hit” or “losing”. The special figure display result determination table corresponding to the special figure designation buffer value is selected and set (step S90239). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the first special figure display result determination table 90130A shown in FIG. 53A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the second special figure display result determination table 90130B shown in FIG. 53B is set in the use table. Further, the CPU 90103 may select the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state.

  The first special figure display result determination table 90130A displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1 'for determining the special map display result, whether or not to control the large hitting game state as "big hit" and to control the variable display result to the small hitting game state as "small hit". It is a table that is referred to for determination. The second special figure display result determination table 90130B displays the variable display result before the fixed special symbol which becomes the variable display result in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is derived and displayed. Based on the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special map display result, whether or not to control the big hit game state as “big hit” and whether to control the variable display result as the “small hit” to the small hit game state. It is a table that is referred to for determination.

  In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, special figure display is performed according to whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is a normal state, a time saving state (low accuracy state), or a probable change state (high accuracy state). A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 'for determining the result is assigned to a special map display result such as "big hit", "small hit", or "losing". In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the time saving state (low-probability state), or the probable change state (high-precision state), a disturbance for determining the special figure display result is made. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 'is assigned to a special map display result of "big hit" or "losing".

  In the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, the table data indicating the determined value to be compared with the random number value MR1 ′ for determining the special figure display result is such that the special figure display result is “ This is determination data that is assigned to the result of determining whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state as "big hit". In each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high accuracy state), it is in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). More determined values are assigned to the special map display result of “big hit” than before. As a result, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the special map display result is set to “big hit” as compared with the normal state or the time saving state (low-precision state). When the state is controlled, the probability of being determined increases. That is, in each of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the probable state, it is compared with the normal state or the time reduction state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, so that the probability of being determined to control to the big hit gaming state increases.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 90130A, a determined value in a predetermined range (a value in a range of “30000” to “30350”) is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, no determined value is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. With such a setting, the variable display result is determined based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied, When the variable display result is determined based on the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, the special figure display result is displayed. The ratio determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state as "small hit" can be made different.

  In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hitting game state as "small hit". In the game state where the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 906B, such as the state (high-precision high base state), the small hitting game state in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball may occur. By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to a delay in the game. In the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a determined value in a predetermined range different from the setting in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. Is also good. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 90130B, a smaller determined value than in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A may be assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit”. In this way, the ratio determined to be controlled to the small hitting game state in the high base state such as the time saving state or the probable change state may be lower than in the low base state such as the normal state or the probable change state without the time saving state. Good. Alternatively, regardless of which of the first start condition and the second start condition is satisfied, the special figure display result may be determined with reference to the common special figure display result determination table.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90239 shown in FIG. 52, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is changed to "big hit", "small hit", or "losing". It is determined whether the special figure display result is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “loss” by comparing with the determined value assigned to each special figure display result (step S90240).

  Since the special figure display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state is selected in step S90239, in the processing in step S90240, the game state when variable display of a special figure game or the like is started is changed. It is determined whether or not the special figure display result is a "big hit" using different determination data depending on whether or not. For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the normal state or the time saving state, the game state is displayed in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A or the second special figure display result determination table 90130B. The table data corresponding to the normal state or the time saving state is selected as the data for normal determination, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 'is determined with reference to this data. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special figure game or the like is started is the probable change state, the game state is displayed in the first special figure display result determination table 90130A and the second special figure display result determination table 90130B. The table data corresponding to the probable change state is selected as the special determination data, and the special figure display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 'is determined with reference to this data.

  After the special figure display result is determined in step S90240, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" (step S90241). If it is determined that the hit is a "big hit" (step S90241; Yes), a big hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to an on state (step S90242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 54 is selected and set as the use table for determining the big hit type to one of a plurality of types (step S90243).

  The big hit type determination table 90131 determines the big hit type to be one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 ′ for big hit type determination when it is determined that the special map display result is to be set to “big hit” and the big hit gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referred to. In the big hit type determination table 90131, the special symbol that is variably displayed (fluctuated) in the special figure game is the first special figure (a special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A) or the second special figure (second figure). The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type, such as "non-probable change", "probable change", or "probability", depending on whether the game is a special figure display device 904B). It is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table 90131, the assignment of the determined value to the "big hit" big hit type differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. That is, when the fluctuation special map is the first special map, the determined value in the predetermined range (a value in the range of “82” to “99”) is assigned to the “big hit” jackpot type, while the fluctuation special map is Is the second special map, the determined value is not assigned to the big hit type of “probability”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to one of a plurality of types based on the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A. And a case where the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on a second start condition for starting a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. Thus, the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be “probable” can be made different. In particular, in the special map game using the second special map, it is not determined that the big hit type is set to “shock” and the state is controlled to be in the short-time open big hit state. In a game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the 906B, it is possible to avoid a frequent occurrence of a short-term open big hit state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to a prolonged game. .

  Note that, even when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a determined value in a predetermined range different from that in the case where the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the "big hit" big hit type. Good. For example, when the fluctuation special map is the second special map, a smaller determined value than when the fluctuation special map is the first special map may be assigned to the "big hit" big hit type. Alternatively, the big hit type may be determined with reference to the common table data regardless of whether the fluctuation special map is the first special map or the second special map.

  By referring to the jackpot type determination table 90131 set in step S90243 shown in FIG. 52, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 ′ for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is changed to “non-probable”, It is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used according to which of the determined values assigned to each of the jackpot types “probable” and “probable” (step S90244).

  By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S90244, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is determined to be one of a time-saving state and a probable state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the time-saving state. Is determined before the fixed special symbol as the variable display result is derived. The determined big hit type is stored, for example, by setting a big hit type buffer value which is a storage value of the big hit type buffer provided in the RAM 90102 in accordance with the big hit type determined in this way (step S90245). As an example, if the jackpot type is “non-probable”, the jackpot type buffer value is “0”, if “probable”, it is “1”, and if it is “probable”, it is “2”.

  If it is determined in step S90241 that it is not "big hit" (step S90241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is "small hit" (step S90246). When it is determined that the small hit is detected (step S90246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the RAM 90102 is set to the ON state (step S90247).

  If it is determined in step S90246 that it is not "small hit" (step S90246; No), or after executing one of the processes in steps S90245 and S90247, whether to control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the pre-determination of whether or not, and further, the result of the determination of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state (step S90248). As an example, if it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, the special figure display result becomes a loss pattern corresponding to a predetermined result of “losing”. The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is set as the fixed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number "2" as the symbol is set as the fixed special symbol. If it is determined in step S90241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, “3”, “5”, and “7”, which are big hit symbols, are determined according to the result of determining the big hit type in step S90244. Is set as a fixed special symbol. In other words, according to the result of determining the jackpot type to be “non-probable”, a special symbol indicating the number “3” which is a normal jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as the fixed special symbol. In addition, according to the result of determining that the jackpot type is “probable change”, a special symbol indicating the number “7” which is a probable variable jackpot symbol among the normal open round jackpot symbols is set as the fixed special symbol. According to the result of determining the jackpot type to be “spotted”, a special symbol indicating the number “5”, which is a short-term open jackpot symbol, is set as a fixed special symbol.

  After the fixed special symbol is set in step S90248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and the special symbol normal process ends. . If the reserved number of special figure games using the first special figure is “0” in step S90235 (step S90235; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S90250), and then a special symbol is set. The normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 905 is sent from the main board 9011 to the effect control. It is determined whether or not the data has been transmitted to the substrate 9012. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demo display setting ends. On the other hand, if the transmission has not been performed, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting ends.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S90111 in FIG. 49 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 55, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S90261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S90261; Yes), the big hit change pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 56A is selected as a use table for determining a change pattern to one of a plurality of types. It is set (step S90262). Also, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 90102, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “non-probable”, “probable”, or “probable” (step S90263).

  When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (predetermined), the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A converts the variation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type into a random value MR3 ′ for determining the variation pattern. Is a table that is referred to to determine one of a plurality of types based on the. In the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A, a numerical value (to be compared with the random value MR3 'for determining the variation pattern, depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “non-probable change”, “probable change”, or “probable”) ( (Determined value) is the variation pattern PA4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-2, variation pattern PB5'-1 to variation pattern PB5'-4, and variation pattern PC1'-1 to variation pattern PC1′-2.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion where the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern differs depending on which of the plurality of types has been determined. . For example, the variation pattern PA4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-1, variation pattern PB4'-2, and variation pattern PB5'-1 depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable" or "probable". The assignment of the determined value to the variation pattern PB5'-4 is different. This makes it possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern in accordance with the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A, there is a portion in which a determined value is assigned to a different variation pattern depending on which of the plurality of types has been determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable” or “probable”, the variation pattern PA4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-1, the variation pattern PB4′-2, and the variation pattern PB5′−1 to the variation pattern PB5 While the determined value is assigned to '-4, the determined value is not assigned to the variation patterns PC1'-1 to PC1'-2. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “probable”, while the determined values are assigned to the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-2, the variation patterns PA4′−1, No determined value is assigned to the variation pattern PB4'-1, the variation pattern PB4'-2, and the variation pattern PB5'-1 to the variation pattern PB5'-4. With this, when the special map display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the short-term open big hit state according to “slippery”, the variation pattern is determined to be different from the case where the normal open big hit state is controlled. be able to.

  In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be any of “non-probable”, “probable”, and “probable”, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the probable state, or the time reduction state Thus, the assignment of the determined value to each variation pattern may be made different. This makes it possible to vary the ratio determined by the same variation pattern depending on which of the plurality of types of game state. Further, when the jackpot type is determined to be one of “non-probable”, “probable”, and “probable”, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is the normal state, the probable state, or the time reduction state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different fluctuation patterns. Thereby, it is possible to determine a different variation pattern depending on which of the plurality of types of game state. In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “non-probable”, more determined values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA4′-1 indicating the normal reach fluctuation pattern than in the case of “probable”. I have. Therefore, when the super-reach reach effect is executed, the probability of the jackpot type being “probable change” is higher than “non-probable change”, so that the player can be expected to play. Interest can be improved. In the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 56 (A), more determined values are assigned to the variation pattern performing the super reach B reach effect than the variation pattern performing the super reach A reach effect. ing.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S90261 shown in FIG. 55 (step S90261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S90264). If the small hit flag is on (step S90264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B shown in FIG. 56 (B) is selected as a usage table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns And set (step S90265).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S90264 (step S90264; No), a loss variation pattern determination table 90132C shown in FIG. 56C is used as a usage table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. Select and set (step S90267). For example, by determining whether or not the time saving flag provided in the RAM 90102 is on, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in which the time saving control is performed in the gaming state or the time saving state (step S90268). ).

  The loss variation pattern determination table 90132C indicates, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result should be “losing”, determines the variation pattern based on the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 ′. This is a table that is referred to to determine one of them.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, the determined value is changed so that the ratio determined in each variation pattern is different depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time saving control in the time saving state. Some parts are assigned to patterns. Thus, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern can be made different depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probable change state, or the time saving state is under the time saving control. In the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, there is a portion where a determined value is assigned to a different variation pattern depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time saving control in the time saving state. Thereby, it is possible to determine a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time saving control in the time saving state. In the losing variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the jackpot variation pattern determination table 90132A in FIG. 56A, more determination values are assigned than the determination values assigned to the variation patterns for performing the super-reach reach effect. Values are assigned to non-reach variation patterns. Therefore, when the super-reach reach effect is executed, the expectation of the big hit is high. Also, in the loss variation pattern determination table 90132C, in contrast to the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A in FIG. 56 (A), the variation in which the reach effect of the super reach B is performed is larger than the variation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach A is performed. Decision values are assigned so that there are fewer patterns. Therefore, the super reach B has a higher expectation of a big hit when the reach effect is executed than the super reach A. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention also to the type of the reach effect to be executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  After executing any one of the processes in steps S90263, S90265, and S90268 shown in FIG. By referring to the variation pattern determination table set in the table, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S90269). Here, in the process of step S90269, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game executed by using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A based on the establishment of the first starting condition is determined. Or whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game executed using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B based on the establishment of the second starting condition is determined. Using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 ′ for determining the fluctuation pattern updated by the common random counter or the like, the fluctuation pattern can be determined to any one of a plurality of types by the common processing module.

  When the big hit flag is on, the table data corresponding to the big hit type specified by the process of step S90263 is selected from the table data constituting the big hit variation pattern determination table 90132A, and the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination is selected. It is only necessary to be able to determine the fluctuation pattern to which the determined value corresponding to the numerical data indicating 'is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine any one of the plurality of variation patterns prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “big hit”.

  When the small hit flag is on, it is only necessary to refer to the small hit variation pattern determination table 90132B and determine the variation pattern to which the determined value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 'for determining the variation pattern is assigned. In this way, the CPU 90103 only needs to be able to determine a variation pattern prepared in advance corresponding to the determination result of setting the special figure display result to “small hit”.

  When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, by determining the variation pattern in the process of step S90269, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach”. That is, the process of step S90269 includes a process of determining whether or not to make the variable display state of the decorative symbol a reach state when the variable display result is “losing”.

  After the variation pattern is determined in step S90269, a special figure variation time which is a variable display time of a special symbol according to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S90270). The special figure fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the variable display result (the special figure display result). It is.

  After executing the process of step S90270, a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 904A and a second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B are performed according to the variable special figure designation buffer value. The setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special figure games using the figures (step S90271). As an example, if the variable special figure designating buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 904B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90271, setting for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S90272). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 sends the game state designation command, the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address (head address) of the first variation start command table in the ROM 90101 is provided in the RAM 90102. The data is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the command buffer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 sends the game state designation command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the prepared second variation start command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  Here, the first variation start command is a command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A. The second variation start command is a command for designating a variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 905 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is a command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. The game state designation command is a command for designating the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  Each time a predetermined command control process is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed based on the command transmission setting in step S90272, a game state designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012, The change start command or the second change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the first hold storage number notification command, or the second hold storage number notification command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after transmitting the variable display result notification command first, the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command The command may be transmitted in the order of a game state designation command, a first reserved storage number notification command, or a second reserved storage number notification command.

  After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step S90273), and the change pattern setting processing ends.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing executed in step S90113 in FIG. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 90103 first determines whether or not the special figure fixed display flag provided in the RAM 90102 is on (step S90291). Here, the special figure confirmed display flag is set to an on state by the process of step S90295 described later, in response to the confirmed special symbol being a variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is off in step S90291 (step S90291; No), the setting for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol is performed (step S90292). At this time, the setting for transmitting the decoration symbol stop command to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90293). Also, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure fixed display time (step S90294). For example, in the process of step S90294, a timer initial value predetermined in correspondence with the special figure fixed display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 90102. Then, after setting the special figure confirmed display flag to the ON state (step S90295), the special symbol stop processing ends. After the determined special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S90292 in this manner, the special symbol is processed by the special symbol process according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt until the special symbol finalized display time set in step S90294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S90291 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is ON in step S90291 (step S90291; Yes), it is determined whether the special figure fixed display time has elapsed (step S90296). For example, in the process of step S90296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer for which the timer initial value has been set by the process of step S90294, is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0” is determined. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value of the game control process is a value other than “0”, the timer value is updated so as to be decremented by one every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. Just fine. If the special figure fixed display time has not elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; No), the special symbol stop processing is terminated, and the process stands by until the special figure fixed display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure fixed display time has elapsed in step S90296 (step S90296; Yes), the special figure fixed display in progress flag is cleared and turned off (step S90297), and it is determined whether the big hit flag is on. A determination is made (step S90298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S90298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the effect waiting time at the start of the big hit (step S90299). Further, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90300). For example, in the process of step S90300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance to transmit the hit start designation command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is stored in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store it in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S90301). In addition, a setting for terminating the probable change state or the time saving state is performed (step S90302). For example, as the process of step S90302, a process of clearing the probability change flag and the time saving flag to turn off the status, a process of clearing the time saving number counter for counting the number of remaining special figure games executed during the high base, and the like. Should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to “4” corresponding to the pre-big hit opening process (step S90303), the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S90298 (step S90298; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S90304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S90304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the small hit start effect waiting time (step S90305). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the fact that the special figure display result is “small hit” from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S90307). In addition, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8” which is a value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (step S90308).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S90304 (step S90304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S90309). After executing one of the processes of steps S90308 and S90309, it is determined whether or not the time-saving control or the high-opening control during the high base is to be ended (step S90311), and if it is to be ended (step S90311; Yes), the time saving control, the high opening control, and the like are ended, and the setting for transmitting the time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving state is performed (step S90312), and the special symbol stop processing is ended. On the other hand, when not ending (step S90311; No), the special symbol stop processing is ended as it is. For example, in the process of step S90311, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value stored in the time reduction counter is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 from the value. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated time-saving number count value matches a predetermined time-saving end determination value (for example, “0”). At this time, if it matches the time saving end determination value, the time saving control, the high opening control, and the like during the high base may be ended by clearing the time saving flag and turning off the time. On the other hand, if it does not match the time saving end determination value, the state of the time saving flag may be maintained and the special symbol stop processing may be ended. In addition, even when the game state is the probable change state, if the time-saving flag is on, it may be determined whether to end the time-saving control, and the time-saving control may be ended based on the determination result that the time-saving control is to be ended. While the time saving control is terminated in this way, the probability change control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" or until a predetermined number of special figure games are executed. As a result, the game state can be changed to a latent probability change. In the probable change state in which the time saving flag is on and the probable change flag is on, the time saving control is continuously performed until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  In the process of step S90311, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the end of the probability change control is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the RAM 90102, and the probability change control end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90101 or the like is referred to. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to end the probabilistic change control, for example, when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probable change control reaches a predetermined probable change end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S90311, the process of ending the probable change control may not be performed, and the probable change control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "big hit".

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  In the effect control board 9012, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute the effect control main process shown in FIG. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 90120 shown in FIG. 58 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 9012 to The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S9072; No), the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 9011 is generated separately from the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, a control signal serving as an effect control command is sent from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015 among input ports included in the I / O 90125. Take in. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 90122, for example. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer. Thereafter, effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S9072; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S9073), and a command analysis process is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main board 9011 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis processing in step S9074, it is determined whether an abnormal command has been received from the main board 9011 (step S9075). The abnormal command is related to winning such as, for example, making it appear that the player has won a prize even though the player has not actually won (more specifically, detecting a prize to a variable prize device that is not actually opened). This command is transmitted when at least one of a plurality of abnormalities is detected, such as an abnormality (winning abnormality) or an abnormality caused by the upper plate or the lower plate being filled with game balls (dish abnormality). As the abnormal command, a command corresponding to each of a plurality of abnormalities is transmitted from the main board 9011 side. If it is determined that an abnormal command has been received (step S9075; Yes), an abnormal notification process for notifying the player that an abnormality has occurred is executed (step S9076). In the abnormality notification process, for example, a process of displaying a message indicating which type of abnormality has occurred on the image display device, turning on a lamp, or outputting sound may be performed. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the abnormality notification can be executed at any timing by receiving the abnormality command by the process of step S9076, and an icon as a special display is displayed. The abnormality notification can be performed within a predetermined period after the notification of the abnormality.

  After executing the processing of step S9076, or when it is determined in step S9075 that no abnormal command has been received (step S9075; No), it is determined whether or not the effect setting has been performed by the player (step S9077). . In the process of step S9077, for example, it is determined whether or not an effect setting button (not shown) has been operated by the player by confirming whether or not the sensor for detecting the operation of the player has detected. When it is determined that the effect setting has been performed (step S9077; Yes), an effect setting process is performed (step S9078). In the process of step S9078, when the effect setting button is operated by the player, for example, the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the type of the output music and the background, the luminance setting of the image display device 905, and the game effect lamp Settings for effects such as brightness settings of various lamps such as 909 may be changed. It should be noted that, for example, it is possible to select which effect setting to be changed from the menu screen, or to perform a different operation corresponding to a change item desired by the player, and the setting corresponding to the operation is changed. You may do so. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, by performing the processing of step S9078, the setting relating to the effect can be executed at any timing due to the operation of the player. The setting relating to the effect can be made even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed. Specifically, the processing of step S9078 can be executed at any timing, such as during demonstration display, during variable display, and during control of a big hit game. Note that the process of step S9078 may not be executed during a period (for example, 0.1 second) from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display. Specifically, the process of step S9078 may be prohibited during a period from the reception of the symbol confirmation command to the reception of the change start command.

  After executing the processing of step S9078, or when it is determined in step S9077 that the effect setting has not been performed (step S9077; No), the effect control process processing is executed (step S9079). In the effect control process processing of step S9079, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 905, a sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, a lighting operation of a decorative luminous body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decoration LED, With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as the driving operation in the rendering model, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed in accordance with the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 9011 and the like.

  Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S9080), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 as various random numbers used for effect control is generated by software. Update. Thereafter, the process returns to step S9072.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process performed in step S9079 in FIG. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 59, effect control CPU 90120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S90170 to S90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in RAM 90122, for example. I do.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start wait processing is based on whether a first change start command or a second change start command from the main board 9011 has been received, etc. And the like.

  The variable display start setting process in step S90171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting processing is performed in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform the variable display execution setting and other various effecting operations, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to a special symbol variation pattern, a type of display result, and the like. . In the variable display start setting process, according to the degree of advantage, special display effects such as icons as special displays are displayed step by step, and advantageous states such as cut-in notice and step-up notice are performed. The execution setting of the notice effect as an effect suggesting that the control is performed is performed. Note that the degree of advantage for the player is, for example, a state that is advantageous to the player when a certain event occurs (a state in which a privilege is given or given, or a state in which the rate of privilege grant is high). , An advantageous state different from a privilege), or a ratio in an advantageous state. In addition, the privilege indicated to be highly likely to be granted by the special mode may be the same as the object of the advantage (advantageous state) for the player, and is different from the object of the advantage for the player. It may be something. Also, the special display effect in this embodiment indicates that the special image such as an icon as a special display is displayed in a stepwise manner according to the degree of advantage. For example, the special display is a variable display. (Active display) or meter display may be used. Various types of effects, such as those that gradually change the display mode of the active display and those that gradually increase the meter display, may be used. May be. That is, the concept of the step-by-step change of the special display includes a step-by-step display of a special image such as an icon, a step-by-step change of the active display mode, and an increase (or decrease) of the meter display. For example.

  The variable display effect process in step S90172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern in accordance with the timer value of the effect control process timer provided in the RAM 90122, and reads various control data during the variable display of the decorative symbol. Effect control. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, a special display effect and a notice effect are executed. After performing such an effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the effect control pattern at the time of changing the special figure, or the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 9011 is received. In response to the above, a fixed decorative symbol as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed in response to the end code being read from the special figure variation effect control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is provided. When the elapsed time has elapsed, the variable decoration result can be determined by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative symbol on the side of the effect control board 9012 without relying on the effect control command from the main board 9011. When the fixed decoration symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The waiting process per special figure in step S90173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting processing, effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from main board 9011 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is “6” which is a value corresponding to the big hit medium effect process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. Is updated to “4”. Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “losing”, and the value of the effect process flag is set to the initial value. Update to "0". Also, the special figure hit waiting process of step S90173 includes a process of performing the above-described jackpot promotion promotion execution when the hit start designation command designates the start of the jackpot gaming state excluding "probability". ing.

  The small hit production process in step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. To output sound or sound effects from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (effect sound signal) to the sound control board 9013, and to output a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 9014 to play the game effect lamp 909. And various effect controls in the small hitting game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the decoration LED. In the small hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011, the value of the production process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end production. .

  The small hit end effect processing of step S90175 is processing executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. To output sound or sound effects from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command (effect sound signal) to the sound control board 9013, and to output a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 9014 to play the game effect lamp 909. And various kinds of effect control at the end of the small hitting game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the decoration LED. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”.

  The big hit production process in step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In this big hit production process, the production control CPU 90120 sets, for example, a production control pattern corresponding to the production contents in the big hit game state, and displays a production image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. Also, a command (effect sound signal) is output to the voice control board 9013 to output a voice or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and a game effect lamp 909 or decoration is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 9014. Various effect control in the big hit game state, such as turning on / off / flashing the use LED, is executed. In the big hit middle production process, control for executing a big hit middle promotion effect and a notification effect is performed. In the big hit effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 9011.

  The ending effect process of step S90177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In the ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents on the display screen of the image display device 905. Output of a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 9013 to output a voice or sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R; Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the LED at the end of the big hit game state are executed.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S90171 in FIG. 59 as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads, for example, EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 9011, so that the special figure display result is “losing”. It is determined whether or not it becomes (step S90551). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “losing” (step S9051; Yes), the designated fluctuation pattern is read, for example, by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011. Is determined to be a non-reach fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” (step S90552).

  If it is determined in step S9052 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; Yes), the combination of the fixed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols that constitute the non-reach combination is determined (step S90553). As an example, in the process of step S90553, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left determined symbol, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, is extracted, and a predetermined left determined value previously stored in the ROM 90121 or the like is extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table or the like, the left determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a right determined symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thereby, the right determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined medium-fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thereby, the middle fixed decoration symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decoration symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined.

  If it is determined in step S90552 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S90552; No), the combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S90554). As an example, in the process of step S90554, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left-right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and predetermined left-right determined values stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like are extracted. By referring to the symbol determination table, the symbol numbers which are stopped and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 among the determined decorative symbols are the same. Determine the decoration pattern. Further, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining a medium-fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122, by referring to a predetermined medium-fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like, Then, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium determined decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 is determined. Here, for example, in the case where the determined decorative symbol is a big hit combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol and the right determined decorative symbol, an arbitrary value is set. By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to or from the symbol number of the medium determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decorative symbol, a difference (symbol difference) between the left fixed decorative symbol and the right fixed decorative symbol with the symbol number may be determined, and a middle fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  If it is determined in step S9051 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S9051; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “probability” (step S90555). ). When it is determined that the pattern is “small hit” or “shock” (step S90555; Yes), for example, the final decorative pattern corresponding to the case of “small hit” or “shock” such as the opening chance eye is determined. A combination is determined (step S90557). As an example, in response to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1′-1 to PC1′-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbol constituting one of the plurality of types of opening chances is displayed. The determined combination of decorative symbols is determined. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the RAM 90122 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like is referred to. Thus, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chance eyes may be determined.

  If it is determined in step S525 that the change is "non-probable" or "probable" other than "small hit" (step S90555; Yes), the combination of the final decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S90556). As an example, in the process of step S90556, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like of the RAM 90122 is extracted, and then a predetermined jackpot determined symbol stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like. By referring to the determination table or the like, the same symbol numbers are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" on the screen of the image display device 905. Decide the decoration pattern.

  As a specific example, regardless of whether the jackpot type is “non-probable” or “probable”, in the process of step S90556, any one of a plurality of types of normal symbols or probable-variable designs is displayed. What is necessary is just to select and determine it as the fixed decoration symbol which comprises a big hit combination.

  After executing any of the processes of step S90553, step S90554, step S90556, and step S90557, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the execution of the special display effect in which a special image such as an icon is displayed stepwise according to the degree of advantage. Is performed (step S90559).

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special display effect execution setting process performed in step S90559 of FIG. In the special display effect execution setting process illustrated in FIG. 61, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not to execute the special display effect (step S90601). More specifically, in the process of step S90601, whether to execute the special display effect is determined with reference to the special display effect execution determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 62A is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a special display effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute the special display effect is set to the illustrated determination ratio according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set such that the ratio of the variable display result to "big hit" is higher when the special display effect is executed than when the special display effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the special display effect is executed. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the determination ratio is different depending on whether it is a super reach big hit or a normal reach big hit. (It is determined that the super reach big hit is executed more than the normal reach big hit.) If the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determined rate may be further changed according to the variation pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 61, after executing the processing of step S90601, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the special display effect in step S90601 (step S90602). When it is determined not to execute the special display effect (step S90602; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the special display effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special display effect is to be executed (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines an execution mode of the special display effect (step S90603). Specifically, in the process of step S90603, the execution mode of the special display effect is determined to be one of a plurality of modes with reference to the special display effect execution mode determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 62 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special display effect execution mode determination table. In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, in this embodiment, special display effects such as “pattern A”, “pattern B”, and “pattern C” are set. The determined ratio is set accordingly. Specifically, the mode of “pattern A” is a mode in which a star icon is displayed, and the mode of “pattern B” is a mode in which a star icon and a triangular icon are displayed. The mode of "C" is a mode in which a star icon, a triangular icon, and a round icon are displayed. As shown in the drawing, the special display effect execution mode determination table according to this embodiment shows that the “pattern B” mode is more “pattern C” mode than the “pattern B” mode than the “pattern B” mode. Is determined so that the ratio of the variable display result being "big hit" is higher when executed. (That is, the ratio where the more icons displayed are "big hit".) Is determined so that is higher). Therefore, the development destination of the effect is different depending on which icon is displayed, and it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed. In the illustrated example, three types of “pattern A” to “pattern C” are shown. However, even if there is a mode in which only a triangular icon is displayed or a mode in which only a circular icon is displayed, Good. Also, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of executions of the special display effect is one (only the presence or absence of execution is determined in step S90601 in FIG. 61), but the special display effect is executed a plurality of times. (The larger the number of executions, the higher the ratio of “big hits”). In that case, one type of icon may be displayed each time the execution is performed (see FIG. 61). The number of executions may also be determined in step S90601, and a mode corresponding to the variation pattern and the number of times may be determined in the process of step S90603). Further, the number of displayed icons may be the same, or the ratio of “big hit” may be changed according to the combination of displayed icons (ie, the number of icons displayed according to the variable display result). Combinations may be determined at different rates).

  Returning to FIG. 61, after executing the processing of step S90603, the effect control CPU 90120 performs the pseudo-running gaseous fluctuation pattern (PB3′-1, PB3 shown in FIG. 47) in which the pseudo-running fluctuation is not performed and only the pseudo-running effect is performed. '-2, PB5'-1, PB5'-2) is determined by confirming the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 9011 (step S90604). If it is determined that the pattern is not a fluctuating pattern of the pseudo-sequence (step S90604; No), that is, if it is a fluctuating pattern in which the fluctuating repetition is performed or if it is not a fluctuating pattern of the pseudo-run, the execution timing determination table shown in FIG. 1, the execution timing of the special display effect is determined (step S90605), and the special display effect execution setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous gasket (step S90604; Yes), the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 63 (B) (step S90606). Then, the special display effect execution setting process ends. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, a maximum of one pseudo-run change is performed (one re-change), but a variable display effect of “pseudo-run” is provided. May be executed more than once, for example, two or three times. In such a case, in the step S90604 of FIG. It is determined whether or not an effect is performed, and when a failed effect is performed, a timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap is determined as the execution timing of the special display effect. Good (the execution timing may be determined with reference to an execution timing determination table in which the superimposition timing cannot be selected).

  FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table that is referred to to determine the execution timing of the special display effect. FIG. 63 (A) shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 1 which is referred to when the pattern is a fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation is performed or is not a pseudo-run fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 4 shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table 2 which is referred to in the case of a fluctuation pattern of pseudo continuous gasses. In the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 63 (A), three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set as the determination timing, and are set to the illustrated determination ratios. Note that “timing 1” to “timing 3” shown in FIG. 63A are execution timings set in advance according to the variation pattern. The timing is different for each pattern. All the execution timings of “timing 1” to “timing 3” may be different timings according to the variation pattern. For example, the execution timing of “timing 1” may be a common execution timing regardless of the variation pattern. Good. On the other hand, in the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. 63 (B), two types of timings, such as “timing 1” and “timing 3”, are set as the determination timing, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. . As will be described in detail later, the execution timing of “timing 2” is set to the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the special display effect overlap, and the other “timing 1” and “timing 1” The execution timing of the “timing 3” is set to an execution timing in which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap (see FIG. 65). In the illustrated example, three types of timings “timing 1” to “timing 3” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in the respective execution timing determination tables. .

  Here, the special display effect and its execution timing will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing details of the special display effect. As shown in FIG. 64, when the special display effect is started, a predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game is performed. The predetermined suggestion effect is, for example, an effect indicating whether or not to display an icon as a special display (see FIGS. 71 (b) to (e)), and when the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect indicates success. The special display change notification for notifying that the icon as the special display is displayed is continuously performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and thereafter, the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 in FIG. (Special display changes). Then, the special display effect ends. In this embodiment, an example in which the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period and then the special display is changed is shown. However, the special display change notification is continuously performed during the above-described predetermined period of 10 seconds. It may not be performed, for example, may be performed continuously for 6 seconds, and the special display change notification may not be performed for the remaining 4 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the failure effect or the announcement effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is displayed, but the special display change notification is continuously performed during the predetermined period. , Or a period counted by a timer, such as 10 seconds. Further, the example shown in FIG. 64 shows a case where the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect indicates success. (In this embodiment, the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect always indicates success in order to facilitate understanding. However, the production result of the predetermined suggestion production may indicate failure, in which case, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is not displayed) and the special display production is performed as it is. It should just end. The process of step S90601 in FIG. 61 determines whether or not to execute such a special display effect. In the case where the production result of the predetermined suggestion effect includes a result indicating failure, the mode of executing the predetermined suggestion effect indicating failure may be selected in the process of step S90603 illustrated in FIG. 61.

  FIG. 65 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the special display effect. FIG. 65 (A) shows the execution timing of the special display effect in the case of the pseudo-running gaseous fluctuation pattern, and FIG. 65 (B) shows the case of the fluctuation pattern other than the pseudo-running gaseous fluctuation. It shows the execution timing of the special display effect in the case of the variation pattern to be performed. FIG. 65 (C) shows the case of a variation pattern other than the pseudo continuous gasket, and specifically shows the execution timing of the special display effect at the time of the non-reach loss variation pattern. In the illustrated example, the variation pattern of non-reach loss is shown, and the other variation patterns are not shown. However, in the case of other variation patterns, as described above, “ “Timing 1” to “Timing 3” are set in advance. As shown in FIG. 65 (A), in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo consecutive gasses, the pseudo consecutive fanning effect to be executed is a failed effect. As described above, in the special display effect, after a result indicating success is displayed as the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect, a special display change notification for notifying that an icon as a special display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that this is done and is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if a failed production is subsequently performed as a pseudo-running production, the player will be discouraged and the interest in the game will be reduced. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo-running gas, the execution of the “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-running-up effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed as the execution timing of the special display effect. Timing cannot be selected. Therefore, in the processing of step S90606 in FIG. 61, the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 2 shown in FIG. are doing. Thus, the execution of the failed effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is to be displayed, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest. When the execution timing is determined in the case where the special display effect is executed a plurality of times with the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo continuous gasket, a plurality of timings are selected from execution timings other than “timing 2” in the processing of step S90606 in FIG. do it. Further, when the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect in the special display effect indicates failure, since the above-described situation does not occur, the execution timing of “timing 2” may be selectable (see FIG. )the same as). On the other hand, even when the production result of the predetermined suggestion production in the special display production indicates a failure, the execution timing of “timing 2” is made unselectable, and after the notification that the icon is not displayed (the predetermined timing as a mini game) A failure effect may be prevented from being performed during a predetermined period of time (after the result of the suggestion effect has failed). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by the result of the predetermined suggestion effect ending in failure and further executing the failure effect. Further, in this embodiment, it is notified that the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed cannot be selected, and that an icon as a special display is displayed. Although the example in which the execution of the failed effect is prohibited for a predetermined period after the execution is shown, the execution timing in which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect (failed effect) and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed may be selectable. In such a case, the failure effect may be executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as a display smaller than usual or a display that is transparent. In addition, the execution timing at which the execution period of the pseudo continuous fanning effect (failure effect) and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed is not made unselectable, but is determined, for example, to a determination ratio of 1% or 2%. The ratio may be limited by making the ratio extremely low as compared with the case where no failed effect is performed. That is, the restriction on the execution of the failed effect includes, in addition to the case where the execution is not performed, the case where the execution is performed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize, and the case where the execution is performed at an extremely low rate. In addition, the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo continuous fanning effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed can be selected, and when “timing 2” is determined, “timing 2” and “timing 2” are selected. By performing a process of shifting the execution timing of the special display effect to a timing such as “timing 2.5” which is an execution timing between “timing 3”, the pseudo display after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed is performed. It may be possible to restrict the failure production from being performed as a continuous production.

  Further, for example, when the execution timing of the special display effect is determined as “timing 1” as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the failure effect is subsequently performed as a pseudo continuous fanning effect after a certain period has elapsed. Therefore, the discouragement of the player can be alleviated to some extent. However, in order to further prevent the player from being discouraged, in the case of the fluctuating pattern of the pseudo-sequence gasket, “Timing 1” and “Timing 2” cannot be selected, that is, before the execution period of the pseudo-rendition effect. The set timing may not be selectable (failure effects are also restricted during the period after the icon as the special display is displayed). According to this, the execution of the failed effect is restricted after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed, so that it is possible to further prevent the gaming interest from being reduced. Note that while the “timing 2” cannot be selected, the determination rate determined as the “timing 1” may be an extremely low determination rate such as 1% or 2%.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-running fluctuation is performed, the pseudo-running-in effect is a successful effect. Therefore, the event that the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period of time and a failure effect is performed after it is suggested that the display is advantageous to the player does not occur, and the event that the player is discouraged does not occur. Therefore, as shown in the figure, as the execution timing of the special display effect, it is also possible to select the execution timing of “timing 2” in which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the special display effect are superimposed. That is, in the processing of step S90605 in FIG. 61, the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1 shown in FIG. 63A including the execution timing of “timing 2”. Also, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), in the case of the non-reach fluctuation pattern as well, in the process of step S90605 in FIG. 61, the execution timing of “timing 2” is included in FIG. 63 (A). Although the execution timing of the special display effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table 1, the execution timing of “timing 1” is compared with the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation shown in FIG. Are common timings (for example, two seconds after the start of the variable display), but the execution timings of “timing 2” and “timing 3” are different. As described above, by providing an execution timing different from the common execution timing according to the variation pattern, it is possible to enhance the effect. As shown in FIG. 65 (C), a special display effect can be executed even with a fluctuation pattern for performing pseudo-running fluctuation and a fluctuation pattern of pseudo-running gas. According to this, in a predetermined period after the notification of the display of the icon as the special display is performed, the pseudo-running effect is not executed in the first place, so that a decrease in gaming interest is prevented. In the case where the execution timing is determined when the special display effect is executed a plurality of times in the fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-run fluctuation is performed (in the fluctuation pattern other than the pseudo-run gaseous pattern), in the process of step S90605 in FIG. It is sufficient to select a plurality of timings from all the execution timings of “to 3”. Also, in the example shown in FIGS. 65A and 65B (the same applies to the case of a reach variation pattern instead of a pseudo succession variation pattern), the execution timing of the special display effect is the timing before the reach, but the reach is performed. During the special display effect may be executed. The pseudo-run variation may be one or more, and one special display effect may be performed for one variation including the first variation, or in one variation including the first variation. A plurality of special display effects may be performed. Further, when a plurality of special display effects are performed, the icons displayed in a stepwise manner increase (for example, when a total of three special display effects are performed, one icon is displayed in one special display effect). Displayed, and finally three icons are displayed, etc.), so that the mode of increasing the degree of advantage may be sufficient.

  Referring back to FIG. 60, after executing the special display effect execution setting process of step S90559, the effect control CPU 90120 gives a notice such as a cut-in notice or a step-up notice for notifying whether or not the variable display result is "big hit". A preview effect execution setting process for performing the effect execution setting is performed (step S90560).

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the announcement effect execution setting process performed in step S90560 of FIG. In the notice effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 66, first, effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute a notice effect (step S90901). Specifically, in the process of step S90901, the presence / absence of execution of a notice effect is determined with reference to a notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, in order to simplify the description and facilitate understanding, it is assumed that a cut-in notice is executed as a notice effect, but other kinds of notice effects may be executed, Different types of notice effects may be executed according to the variable display results.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a notice effect execution determination table. In this embodiment, whether or not to execute a notice effect is set to a determined ratio shown in the figure according to the variable display result. Specifically, the determination ratio is set such that the ratio in which the variable display result is "big hit" is higher in the case where the preview effect is performed than in the case where the preview effect is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the notice effect is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 66, after executing the processing of step S90901, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is determined in step S90901 that an announcement effect is to be executed (step S90902). When it is determined not to execute the notice effect (Step S90902; No), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the notice effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the announcement effect is to be executed (step S90602; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not the special display effect execution setting is performed in the special display effect execution setting process in step S90560 of FIG. (Step S90904). If it is determined that the execution setting of the special display effect has not been made (step S90904; No), the execution timing of the announcement effect is determined with reference to the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. The setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution setting of the special display effect has been made (step S90904; Yes), any of the execution timing determination tables B to D shown in FIGS. Is referred to according to the execution timing of the special display effect, and the execution timing of the notice effect is determined. Then, the announcement effect execution setting process ends.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of an execution timing determination table referred to in order to determine an execution timing of a notice effect. FIG. 68A shows a configuration example of the execution timing determination table A which is referred to when the special display effect is not executed. In the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. 68 (A), four types of timings such as “timing A” to “timing D” are set, and are set to the illustrated determination ratio. FIGS. 68 (B) to 68 (D) show configuration examples of execution timing determination tables B to D which are referred to when a special display effect is executed. More specifically, the execution timing determination table B is a table that is referred to when the special display effect is executed at the timing of “timing 1”, and the execution timing determination table C is a table in which the special display effect is “timing 2”. The execution timing determination table D is a table referred to when the special display effect is executed at the timing of “timing 3”. In each of the execution timing determination tables B to D, the execution timing of the notice effect is set such that the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed cannot be selected (FIG. 69). reference). In the illustrated example, four types of timings “timing A” to “timing D” are set, but more types of execution timings may be set in the respective execution timing determination tables. . In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the execution timing is determined regardless of the variable display result. The execution timing determined according to the result may be different (as opposed to this, the earlier the execution timing, the higher the ratio of “big hit” may be). According to this, the player's attention can also be focused on the timing at which the notice effect is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 68, an example is shown in which each of the execution timing determination tables B to D is prepared in advance according to the execution timing of the special display effect. The execution timing of the special display effect and the announcement effect period are superimposed on the execution timing determination table A shown in FIG. It may be. According to this, the capacity can be reduced.

  Subsequently, the execution timing of the special display effect and the preview effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect when the special display effect is executed. In the case where the special display effect is not executed, any one of the execution timings such as “timing A” to “timing D” shown in the drawing may be determined (see FIG. 68A). The timing of “X” shown in FIG. 69 shows an example in the case where an error occurs at the timing or the effect setting is performed by the player, and the description thereof will be omitted. The case where an error occurs at the timing of “X” or the case where the effect setting is performed by the player will be described later. As described above, even when the special display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game indicates failure, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is also displayed). However, since the special display effect ends as it is, any one of the execution timings of the notice effect may be determined from all the execution timings such as “timing A” to “timing D”.

  Specifically, FIG. 69 (A) is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the announcement effect when the special display effect is executed at “timing 1” in FIG. 63 (see FIG. 65). As shown in the figure, when the special display effect is executed at “timing 1”, any of timings “timing B” to “timing D” other than “timing A” is determined as the execution timing of the announcement effect (“ Timing A "cannot be selected.) That is, effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the announcement effect by referring to execution timing determination table B shown in FIG. 68 (B) in the process of step S90906 in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, the execution timing of “timing B” is a timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the notice effect are overlapped, and “timing B” is also selected as the execution timing of the notice effect. Although it is possible, in this case, the execution timing of “timing B” may not be selectable. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to each effect. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (A), an example is shown in which a failed effect is executed as a pseudo continuous fanning effect, but the same applies to the case where a successful effect is executed. Further, similarly to the case of determining the execution timing of the special display effect, “Timing B” can be selected as the execution timing of the announcement effect when the successful effect is executed, and “Timing B” when the failure effect is executed. May be unselectable (when the timing at which the execution period of the pseudo-running effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is determined as the execution timing, it may be determined in the same manner as in the case of the special display effect). .

  FIG. 69 (B) is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect in the case where the special display effect is executed at “timing 2” in FIG. 63 (see FIG. 65). As shown in the figure, when the special display effect is executed at “timing 2”, any one of “timing A”, “timing C”, and “timing D” other than “timing B” is executed at the timing of the announcement effect. (“Timing B” cannot be selected). That is, effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the announcement effect by referring to execution timing determination table C shown in FIG. 68 (C) in the process of step S90906 in FIG. In the illustrated example, the end timing of the special display effect is the same as the end timing of the pseudo-running effect, but this is an example, and may be different from each other.

  FIG. 69 (C) is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the notice effect in the case where the special display effect is executed at “timing 3” in FIG. 63 (see FIG. 65). As shown in the figure, when the special display effect is executed at “timing 3”, any one of “timing A”, “timing B”, and “timing D” other than “timing C” is set to the timing of the announcement effect. (“Timing C” cannot be selected). That is, effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution timing of the announcement effect by referring to execution timing determination table D shown in FIG. 68 (D) in the process of step S90906 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the execution timing of “timing D” is set as an execution timing in which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are not overlapped. That is, the execution timing of “timing D” is an execution timing that can be commonly selected regardless of the execution timing of the special display effect. Therefore, the notice effect is performed at a timing according to the execution timing of the special display effect, and the notice is performed at the common timing regardless of the execution timing of the special display effect (even when the special display effect is not executed). An effect may be performed, and the effect can be expanded.

  As described above, in the special display effect, after a result indicating success is displayed as the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect, a special display change notification for notifying that an icon as a special display is displayed continues for a predetermined period. It is suggested that this is done and is advantageous for the player. Nevertheless, if the notice effect is executed within a predetermined period from the notification that the icon is displayed until the icon is displayed (the special display changes), the effect of the special display effect is reduced. Would. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the preview effect are not overlapped is determined as the execution timing of the preview effect. This limits the execution of the announcement effect within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon is to be displayed, and prevents the effect of the effect from being reduced. In this embodiment, the execution timing in which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed is not selectable, and during a predetermined period after it is notified that the icon as the special display is displayed. Although the example in which the execution of the notice effect is prohibited is shown, the execution timing in which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed may be selectable. The announcement effect may be executed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize, such as displaying the image in a transparent manner. That is, the restriction on the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case where the notice effect is not executed but also the case where the effect is executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. Further, as described above, even when the special display effect is executed, if the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game indicates failure, the special display change notification is not performed (the icon is also displayed). No), since the special display effect is finished as it is, an event that the effect of the special display effect is reduced does not occur. Therefore, in this case, the execution timing at which the execution period of the special display effect and the execution period of the notice effect are superimposed does not have to be made unselectable (the execution of the notice effect need not be limited).

  Returning to FIG. 60, after executing the notice effect execution setting process of step S90560, the effect control CPU 90120 executes other effects such as an effect for inducing whether or not to reach or a chance-up notice to be performed in the reach state, for example. Whether or not to perform the effect, and other effect settings for determining the type of effect to be executed are made, and an effect control pattern serving as a use pattern is selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90561). The effect control CPU 90120 corresponds to, for example, a variation pattern designated by a variation pattern designation command, a special display effect or a notice effect determined in steps S90559 and S90560, and the like. One of the effect control patterns may be selected and set as a use pattern. Subsequently, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 (such as an effect control timer setting unit) is set in accordance with, for example, the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S90562).

  Then, a setting for starting the fluctuation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90563). At this time, for example, by transmitting a display control command designated by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S90561 to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123, the image display device 905 May be started in each of the decorative pattern display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the display area. After executing the process of step S90563, the effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S90564), and then performs the variable display start setting process. To end.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S90172 of FIG. 59 as the variable display effect processing. When the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 70 is started, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like. (Step S90801). The effect control CPU 90120 updates, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (for example, subtracts 1), and reads an end code from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. Then, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90801; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is a special display effect period for executing a special display effect (step S90802). ). If the special display effect period is determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in accordance with the determination of whether to execute the special display effect and the timing in the process of step S90559 in FIG. Good.

  If it is determined that it is the special display effect period (step S90802; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control of the special display effect (step S90803). Thereby, the special display effect is executed. Specifically, in the process of step S90803, as described above, a predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game is performed, and after the success of the effect of the predetermined suggestion effect is indicated, an icon as a special display is displayed. The special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the icon in the mode determined in step S90603 in FIG. 61 is displayed (the special display changes). In the case where the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect indicates a failure, in the process of step S90803, the special display change notification is not performed after the predetermined suggestion effect indicating the failure is performed (an icon must be displayed). Just fine).

  After executing the processing of step S90803, or when it is determined in step S90802 that it is not the special display effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the notice effect period for executing the notice effect. A determination is made (step S90802). The notice effect period may be determined in advance in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S90561 in accordance with the determination of whether or not to execute the notice effect and the timing in the process of step S90560 in FIG. When it is determined that it is the notice effect period (step S90804; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control of the notice effect (step S90805). As a result, a notice effect is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S90805, or when it is determined in step S90804 that it is not the notice effect period (step S90802; No), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. Is determined (step S90806). The reach effect period may be predetermined in an effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern, for example. If it is determined that it is the reach effect period (step S90806; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs control for executing the reach effect such as displaying a background image for the reach effect (step S90807).

  After execution of the processing of step S90807, or when it is determined in step S90806 that it is not the reach effect period (step S90806; No), the effect control CPU 90120 sets the effect in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. Based on this, control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol is performed (step S90808), and the variable display effect process ends.

  If it is determined in step S90801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S90801; Yes), it is determined whether a symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 9011 has been received (step S90809). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step S90809; No), the variable display effect processing is ended and the apparatus stands by.

  If a symbol confirmation command has been received in step S90809 (step S90809; Yes), the effect control CPU 90120 performs, for example, transmission of a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 90123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) as a display result in the variable display of symbols (step S90810). Subsequently, a predetermined period of time is set as the jackpot start designation command reception waiting time (step S90811). Next, effect control CPU 90120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “3”, which is the value corresponding to the wait process per special figure (step S90812), and ends the effect process during variable display.

  FIG. 71: is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement in case the special display effect and the failure effect as a pseudo continuous fanning effect are performed. More specifically, an example of an effect operation in a case where a special display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” illustrated in FIG. When variable display is started as shown in FIG. 71 (a), as shown in FIG. 71 (b), a predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game is executed, and a special display effect is started. In the illustrated example, a character appears as a predetermined suggestion effect, and a mode indicating success by rotating the displayed coin is illustrated as an example of the predetermined suggestion effect. May have a plurality of modes. Further, as the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (c) to FIG. 71 (d), the predetermined suggestion effect proceeds, and as shown in FIG. ), It is notified that the icon is displayed as the special display change notification (the special display change notification is executed). The special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. In the example shown in the figure, a star-shaped icon is displayed because the pattern “Pattern A” is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (h), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R, and as shown in FIG. 71 (i), "medium". A pseudo continuous fanning effect is performed to display whether the “re” mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pseudo continuous chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905C. Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (j), a failure effect is executed as a pseudo continuous fanning effect, and the “re” mark as the pseudo consecutive chance symbol is in the reach state without being temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the reach state is set after the pseudo-running production (failure production), but the reach state may not be reached after the failure production. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (j), the display position of the icon display as the special display is moved, but the display position does not have to be moved. At that time, the display priority may or may not be given priority to the icon display.

  As described above, when a failed production is performed as a pseudo-running production, a timing in which the execution period of the failed production does not overlap with the execution period of the special display production is determined as the execution timing of the special display production. Does not overlap with the execution period of the failed effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged due to the failure effect being performed after the notification (change) of the icon as the special display is displayed, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Instead of using the timing at which the execution period and the execution period of the failed effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect, the timing at which the execution period and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap may be set as the execution timing of the failure effect. . That is, instead of adjusting the execution timing of the special display effect, the execution timing of the failed effect may be adjusted. Specifically, the execution timing of the failure effect may be selected from a plurality of timings set in advance so that the execution period of the specific effect and the execution period of the failure effect do not overlap.

  FIG. 72: is a figure which shows the example of an effect | action operation | movement at the time of performing a special display effect and a successful effect as a pseudo continuous fanning effect. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in the case where a special display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 2” illustrated in FIG. 65 (B) and a pseudo-running effect of a successful effect is performed. It should be noted that FIGS. 72A to 72F are the same as FIGS. 71A to 71F, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the example shown in FIG. 72, since the successful effect is performed as the pseudo-running effect, the pseudo-running effect is executed even after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72 (g), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R, and as shown in FIG. A pseudo continuous fanning effect is performed in which whether or not the “re” mark is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pseudo consecutive chance symbol in the decorative symbol display area 905C is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (i), a successful effect is executed as a pseudo continuous fanning effect, and a “re” mark as a pseudo continuous chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Then, when the predetermined period elapses after the re-change, the icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. 72 (j). In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which an icon as a special display is displayed after a predetermined period elapses at the time of re-change, but the elapse timing of the predetermined period (that is, the timing of the special display change) is earlier than the timing. It may be. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (h), a predetermined period may elapse during the execution of the pseudo-running effect, and an icon display as a special display may be performed. In addition, when a successful effect is performed as the pseudo-tanning effect and a special display effect is performed, the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be set to the same timing as the end timing of the pseudo-tanning effect. In addition, the end timing of the pseudo-running effect and the elapse timing of the predetermined period may be determined independently of each other. In this way, when the successful production is performed as the pseudo-running production, the situation in which the player does not become discouraged does not occur. Can be determined as the execution timing of the specific effect.

  FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation in the case where the special display effect and the notice effect are executed. Specifically, an example of an effect operation in which a special display effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 69 (A), and then a notice effect is performed at the execution timing of “timing B” is shown. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 69 (A), an example is shown in which the execution period of the notice effect is superimposed on the execution period of the pseudo-running effect, but in the example shown in FIG. 73, in order to facilitate understanding, The effect operation example of the pseudo-running effect is omitted.

  When variable display is started as shown in FIG. 73 (a), as shown in FIG. 73 (b), a predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game is executed, and a special display effect is started. In the illustrated example, a character appears as a predetermined suggestion effect, and a mode indicating success by rotating the displayed coin is illustrated as an example of the predetermined suggestion effect. May have a plurality of modes. Further, as the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect, there may be a result indicating failure as described above. Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (c) to FIG. 73 (d), the predetermined suggestion effect proceeds, and as shown in FIG. 73 (e), the success is indicated as a result of the predetermined suggestion effect, and FIG. ), It is notified that the icon is displayed as the special display change notification (the special display change notification is executed). The special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period. After a lapse of a predetermined period, an icon is displayed as a special display as shown in FIG. 73 (g). In the example shown in the figure, a star-shaped icon is displayed because the pattern “Pattern A” is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (h), a cut-in notice is given as a notice effect. In addition, in addition to the illustrated example, a cut-in notice of a different mode may be executed according to the ratio of “big hit”, or a step-up notice or a battle effect may be performed in addition to the cut-in notice. It may be.

  As described above, when the special display effect is performed, the timing at which the execution period of the special display effect does not overlap with the execution period of the notice effect is determined as the execution timing of the notice effect. The effect execution period does not overlap. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the effect of being reduced due to the announcement effect being performed for a predetermined period after the notification (change) of the icon as the special display is displayed. .

  FIG. 74 illustrates an example of a rendering operation when an abnormality occurs at the timing of “X” illustrated in FIG. 69. Specifically, an abnormal command indicating that a prize to the variable prize device that is not actually opened (prize prize abnormal) is detected from the main board 9011 side at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. An example is shown in the case of receiving the special display effect at a timing after the special display change notification is performed. As shown in FIG. 74A, after the special display change notification is performed, if an abnormal command is received at the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 69, it is determined that the abnormal command is received in step S9075 shown in FIG. It is determined, and an abnormality notification process is performed in the process of step S9076. By this processing, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), an abnormality notification in a mode corresponding to the type of the received abnormal command is performed (in the example shown in the figure, an example of displaying a message of "winning abnormality occurred!" However, besides, a warning sound or a lamp may be turned on, or a different type of notification may be given according to the preset importance of the abnormality.) Then, after the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as a special display is displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (c) (the special display changes). In the example shown in the figure, an example is shown in which the abnormality notification is deleted at the timing of FIG. 74 (c). However, the abnormality notification is continuously performed until the operation of the abnormality notification cancellation is performed. You may. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to notify the abnormality even within a predetermined period after the notification (change) that the icon as the special display is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the gaming situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  FIG. 75 shows an example of the effect operation when the effect setting is performed by the player at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 69. Specifically, an example in which the player performs an operation to increase the volume of the effect at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 69 (the timing after the notification of the special display change in the special display effect) is performed. Is shown. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), after the special display change notification is performed, if the effect setting is performed at the timing of "X" shown in FIG. 69 (when the operation by the player is detected), it is shown in FIG. In step S9077, it is determined that the effect setting has been performed, and the effect setting process is performed in the process of step S9078. As a result of this processing, the fact that the sound volume setting has been changed as shown in FIG. 75 (b) (in the illustrated example, that the sound volume has been changed from “6” to “7”) is notified (setting change notification). ), A process of increasing the volume output by the effect is performed. Then, after the special display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, an icon as a special display is displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (c) (the special display changes). As shown in the figure, it is desirable that the notification that the volume setting has been changed be displayed in such a manner that the special display change notification and the special display will not become unrecognizable for the player. As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform the setting related to the effect even within the predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered. Note that, when the abnormality notification and the setting change notification are performed during the same period, the abnormality notification may be performed with priority (such as setting the abnormality notification layer to the player side than the setting change layer). . Further, some types of abnormalities may not be given priority over setting change notification.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901, the following effects can be obtained.

  The effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect. Therefore, the execution of the failed effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display is changed), and a decrease in the game entertainment is prevented. In addition, the timing set before the execution period of the pseudo-running effect may not be selectable as the execution timing of the special display effect, and according to this, an icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes). Since the execution of the failed effect is limited after the notification that the game is performed is performed, it is possible to further prevent the game entertainment from being reduced. Also, when the special display effect is started, a predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game is performed, and when the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect indicates success, a special notification indicating that an icon as a special display is displayed. The display change notification is continuously performed for a predetermined period, and thereafter, the icon is displayed in the mode determined in step S90603 in FIG. 61 (the special display changes). The effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing at which the execution period of the failed effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the special display effect. For this reason, the execution of the failed production is restricted during the period from the time when the success is shown as the production result of the predetermined suggested production until the icon is displayed (the special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, when performing the special display effect, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the icons to be displayed (combinations of the icons) at different rates according to the variable display result. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to which icon is displayed.

  Further, effect control CPU 90120 determines a timing at which the execution period of the notice effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the notice effect. Therefore, the execution of the announcement effect is restricted for a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display is changed), and a reduction in the effect of the effect can be prevented. The effect control CPU 90120 can also notify the abnormality within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being unable to grasp the gaming situation, and to prevent a decrease in gaming interest. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can make settings relating to the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed (the special display changes). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being lowered. In addition, when the effect-related setting is performed, the effect control CPU 90120 notifies that the effect-related setting has been changed (setting change notification). Therefore, the effect can be improved.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and can solve at least one problem in the related art by using the one described in the above-described embodiment. It may have a configuration of a unit. Further, at least some of the following modifications may be combined.

  In the above embodiment, for the sake of easy understanding, the predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game has been described as always indicating success, but the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect may indicate failure. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the predetermined suggestion effect of the mode shown in FIG. 71 and the like is performed is described. However, there may be a plurality of modes of the predetermined suggestion effect. For example, as shown in FIG. Runners may compete (perform a race effect). FIG. 76 shows an example of an effect operation when a race effect is performed as a predetermined suggestive effect. Specifically, each runner is distinguished by its color. Each runner has a degree of expectation of whether or not the predetermined suggestion effect is successful. The color of each runner is blue, green, red, and rainbow, and the success expectation is high in the order of rainbow> red> green> blue. , Which is distinguished by color), a race (race) is performed, and if either one wins, the success or failure of the predetermined suggested performance is notified. Is reported as the jackpot expectation). Note that the race effect may be performed a plurality of times. Green and blue runners having a relatively low expectation of success as a result of the predetermined suggestion effect belong to the first group, and rainbow and red runners having a relatively high degree of success expectation as a result of the predetermined suggestion effect belong to the second group. It belongs to a group. Note that the race effect is an effect in which one of the runners is won, and is also a type of a selected effect in which the one runner is selected. Also, in a race effect, both appearing runners may stop the race (an aspect in which neither is selected).

  In this example, in a race effect in which at least one of a blue runner and a green runner belonging to the first group that has a relatively low degree of expectation of success of the predetermined suggestion effect is displayed, a ratio at which both runners stop racing (first stop) 76, a race effect in which a red runner belonging to the second group and a rainbow runner belonging to the second group having a relatively high degree of expectation of success of the predetermined suggestion effect as shown in FIG. The ratio (second stop ratio) in which both runners stop the race in a race effect in which a green runner does not appear) is set higher. Accordingly, even when the degree of success expectation of the predetermined suggestion effect is low, a race effect in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear can be executed, and the effect can be enhanced. In particular, usually, the ratio of “losing” is higher than the ratio of “big hit” in the variable display result, and the rendering result as the predetermined suggestive rendering often ends in failure (the special display rendering was performed. However, the production result of the predetermined suggestion production often ends in failure), the above configuration can increase the appearance rate of the race production in which the red runner and the rainbow runner appear, and the player can Each time a race effect in which a red runner and a rainbow runner appear appears, it is expected that the success expectation of the predetermined suggestion effect is high, so that the effect can be enhanced. Conventionally, when a selection effect such as a race effect is performed (a race effect is a type of a selection effect, as described above), conventionally, when no option is selected from the presented options (runner colors) , A production with a high degree of expectation of success (high degree of expectation), which is not usually selected, was executed. However, as described above, since the variable display result is rarely a "big hit" as described above, the production result as the predetermined suggestion production often ends in failure, so that the player is required to perform the production with the high degree of expectation. Contact is rare, and the effect is not enhanced. For this reason, a production that suggests a high degree of expectation (a red runner and a rainbow runner appear) based on the above-mentioned race production (production that includes a mode in which both runners stop) and the relationship between the first suspension ratio and the second suspension ratio. The effect of the production is enhanced because it is easy to perform the production.

  In this example, as an example of the predetermined suggestion effect as a mini-game, an example is described in which the above-described race effect is executed and the success notification degree of the predetermined suggestion effect is reported. Instead, it may be executed as an effect of notifying the jackpot expectation degree of the variable display being executed (an effect in which the jackpot expectation of the winning runner is notified as the present jackpot expectation degree). According to this, even in the variable display in which the jackpot expectation is low, it is possible to execute a race effect in which the red runner and the rainbow runner belonging to the second group having the relatively high jackpot expectation appear, and the effect of the effect is reduced. Can be enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which an icon as a special image is displayed as a special display effect has been described. In addition to the icon being displayed as a special display effect, as described above, a meter as a special display effect may be used. An effect of changing the display (incremental increase) may be executed. Further, an effect (active display change effect) of changing the mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display in accordance with the special display effect may be performed. Furthermore, at the time of the super-reach reach effect (super-reach effect), the active display mode and the special display mode may be changed to the special mode. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. Specifically, in the active display change effect in this example, the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode (white in this example) to “first mode (blue)”, “second mode (green)”, and “third mode”. Mode (red) "as long as it can be displayed. When the final display mode of the meter display as the special display is “first stage” or “second stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “first mode (blue)” and the meter display is performed. In the case where the final display mode is “third stage” or “fourth stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “second mode (green)”, and the final display mode of the meter display is “10th phase”. In the case of “stage”, the final display mode of the active display is “third mode (red)”.

  FIG. 77 shows an active display change effect in which the special display effect is performed, the meter display changes from the normal mode to the first-stage display mode, and the active display changes to the first mode according to the change in the meter display. It shows an example of a production operation in the case of being performed. As shown in FIG. 77A, in the image display device 905, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 77A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), when the special display effect is executed, an effect of blinking and displaying the meter display 9090 as the predetermined suggestion effect is executed. Then, a character A90200 appears (FIG. 77 (C)), and the display mode of the meter display changes to the first-stage display mode in which the color of one of the 10 scales has changed (FIG. 77 (D)). Thereafter, in response to the change in the meter display, the display mode of the active display is changed to the first mode (in the example of FIG. 77 (E), the color is indicated by characters) and displayed (FIG. 77 ( E)).

  Next, specific examples of the super reach effect, the special display effect, and the active display change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. Among them, FIG. 78 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach effect is executed independently (the special display effect and the active display change effect are not executed). FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 show examples of an effect operation example in which a special display effect and an active display change effect are executed when the super reach effect is executed.

  First, with reference to FIG. 78, a case where the super reach effect is executed alone will be described. As shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 905, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 78A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the “left” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the “right” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (C), and the left and right decorative symbols are displayed. Are stopped and displayed in the same symbol (in this example, symbol "7"), and the reach state occurs. Next, when it is time to develop into super reach, a character display such as “Super reach!” Is displayed as shown in FIG. 78 (D), and the racing car race starts as shown in FIG. 78 (E). Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 78 (D) to 78 (G), in this embodiment, during the execution of the super reach effect, the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right end of the display screen of the image display device 905. It shall be.

  Next, when the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect comes during the execution of the super-reach effect, the predetermined cut-in effect is executed during the execution of the super-reach effect, as shown in FIG. 78 (F). In this example, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), on the image display device 905, a predetermined character image 90201, which is different from the effect display of the racing car up to that time, is cut in, and a line such as "Chance!" A predetermined cut-in effect is executed according to the manner in which the display is displayed. In this example, the predetermined cut-in effect is a part of the super reach effect. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, the predetermined cut-in effect may be configured as an effect different from the super-reach effect. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a super-reach effect is interrupted and a predetermined cut-in effect is executed.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), even when the super reach effect is executed independently, the display of the meter display 9090 is started when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. However, when a predetermined cut-in effect is started, the meter display 9090 is deleted as shown in FIG. 78 (F). As described above, in this example, the meter display 9090 is displayed at least until the predetermined cut-in effect is started, so that the execution timing of the predetermined cut-in effect and the meter for changing the special display mode to the special mode are displayed. Until the execution timing of the special change of the display (which will be described in detail later), it is possible to prevent the user from recognizing whether the predetermined cut-in effect or the special change of the meter display is to be executed. Expectation can be given to the fact that a special change is made and the meter display changes. Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and the meter display 9090 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined cut-in effect is started (however, the level of the meter does not change). Further, for example, when the super reach effect is executed alone and the special change of the meter display or the active display change effect is not executed, the meter display 9090 may not be displayed.

  Next, after the execution period of the predetermined cut-in effect has elapsed, the display returns to the racing effect display of the racing car again, and as shown in FIG. 78 (G), an effect as if the friend's racing car finished first. Display. Then, after the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 78 (H), the same symbol as the left and right decorative symbols (in this example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as the “medium” decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol is displayed. Is derived and displayed.

  Next, a case where a special change of the meter display and an active display change effect are executed as the special display effect when the super reach effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. In the examples of FIGS. 79 and 80, a special change of the meter display is executed as a special display effect, and the meter display changes from the normal mode to the tenth-stage display mode. Then, the meter display and the active display change to the special display of the third special display mode. In the special display effect, normally, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the display mode of the meter display changes to the first-stage display mode in which the color of one graduation of 10 is changed. When the special change of the meter display is executed, the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the display mode at the tenth stage. Thus, the special change of the meter display in the special display effect is called a special change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 79A, in the image display device 905, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the active display is displayed in the active display area 909F. In the example of FIG. 79A, the active display is displayed in the normal mode (white). Next, after the “left” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the “right” decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (C), and the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. Is displayed in a stopped state with the same symbol (in this example, symbol "7"), and the reach state occurs. Next, when it is time to develop into super reach, a character display such as "Super reach!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (D), and the race of the racing car is started as shown in FIG. 79 (E). Such an effect display is started, and a super reach effect is started. As shown in FIGS. 79 (D) to (I) and FIG. 80 (J), in this example, during execution of the super reach effect and execution of the special change effect, the right side of the display screen of the image display device 905 is displayed. At the lower end, the fancy display of the decorative design is reduced and displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), immediately before the start of the special display effect, an information effect in which the meter display 9090 blinks is executed.

  Next, after the start of the super-reach effect, when the execution timing of the special change effect as the special display effect comes, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the super-reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), a special change effect is executed on the image display device 905 in a manner of performing an effect display as if a storm had arrived and thunder was sounding. In this example, the special change effect is different from the super reach effect, and the super reach effect is interrupted to execute the special change effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), on the image display device 905, an effect display is performed on the meter display 9090 as if a lightning strike was hit. The display mode changes to the tenth-stage display mode in which the colors of all the scales have changed. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 79 (H), an example in which the color of all the scales is changed to the tenth-stage display mode is shown, but it is not necessary to change to the tenth-stage display mode at a stretch. For example, suspending the super-reach production, or performing a special mini-game production to change the display mode while executing on a low priority layer, and changing to any stage according to the result of the mini-game production You may make it different. The display mode may be changed stepwise by continuously performing the mini-game effects.

  Next, the super reach effect is restarted, and as shown in FIG. 79 (I), the display returns to the effect display of the race of the racing car again, and the display mode of the active display is changed to the third mode (FIG. In the example of 79 (I), the color is indicated by characters). Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (J), an effect display is performed as if the ally racing car finished first, and the meter display and the active display are the special display (“V”) in the third special display mode. Is changed to the special display 202) showing the character When the variable display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 80 (K), the same symbol as the left and right effect symbols (in this example, symbol “7”) is stopped and displayed as the “middle” decorative symbol, and the big hit symbol is displayed. Is derived and displayed.

  In this example, an effect display of a race of a racing car is displayed as a super reach effect, an effect display in which a predetermined character image 90201 is cut in as a predetermined cut-in effect, and a storm arrives as a special change effect and lightning strikes. Although a case has been described where an effect display is performed as if the sound is resounding, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a super-reach effect, a battle effect in which an enemy and an ally character perform a battle may be performed, or a moving image of a predetermined story may be displayed, and various effect modes are conceivable. Further, for example, a button effect accompanied by a button operation may be executed as a predetermined cut-in effect, and any display that is different from the previous effect display during the super reach effect may be cut in any form. . Further, for example, as a special change effect, an effect display in which a character different from the meter display change effect appears, or a button effect involving button operation may be executed, and various effect modes are conceivable.

  According to this, a display (in this example, a meter display) indicating the degree of expectation can be displayed by changing the mode in a plurality of stages as a special display. In addition, when a specific effect (in this example, a super reach effect) is executed, a special change effect (in this example, a special change of the meter display in the special display effect) for changing the mode of the special display can be executed. It is. Further, in this case, the special change effect can be executed in a mode having a higher priority than the specific effect (in this example, the super reach effect is interrupted and the special change effect is executed). Therefore, the mode of the special display can be changed by a mode having priority over the specific effect, so that even when the specific effect is executed, the change of the mode of the special display can be noticed. That is, if both the specific effect and the change of the special display mode are executed, the player may pay attention to the specific effect and may not be able to sufficiently pay attention to the change of the special display mode. Since the mode of the special display can be changed according to the mode described above, the change in the mode of the special display can be noticed even when the specific effect is executed. Also, in this example, an example is described in which the effect of changing the meter display (increasing stepwise) as the special display effect and performing the active display change effect in accordance with the special display effect have been described. Alternatively, the icon shown in the above embodiment may be displayed. For example, when the icons are displayed step by step, a special change of the meter display is executed as a special display effect, and when the display form is changed from the normal form to the display form of the tenth step, the display form of the active display is changed to the third form. Instead of being changed and displayed in the mode (in the example of FIG. 79 (I), the color is indicated by characters), the icon is displayed in the mode of the highest stage (the mode in which the big hit expectation is highest). You may.

  In this example, the display mode of the active display changes according to the change in the meter display. However, for example, the display mode of one of the hold displays changes according to the change in the meter display. It may be configured as follows. In this case, it may be realized by associating and executing a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display and a special display effect (including a special change effect) based on a command at the time of the start winning. Specifically, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the hold display are determined based on the command at the time of the start winning, and an effect is executed based on the determination result. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the display mode of any of the hold displays changes in response to the meter display, a special display effect ( (Including a special change effect).

  Also, for example, the display mode of the hold display can be changed by a pre-reading effect. A display may be displayed. Specifically, when the suspended display corresponding to the variable display to be started is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display), the active display is displayed in the first mode (blue circular display). . Further, in this case, the display mode of the hold display changes according to the change of the meter display, and the active display taking over the display mode of the hold display may change according to the further change of the meter display. Good. In this case, the final display mode of the meter display and the final display mode of the active display may be determined based on the command at the time of the start winning, or may be determined in the variable display start setting process. Is also good. Further, in this case, a special display effect (including a special change effect) may be executable in a period from when the hold display is displayed to when the corresponding variable display ends.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to make settings relating to the effect even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed, and as an example of the setting relating to the effect, the volume of the effect is changed. However, the settings related to the effects are not limited to this. The setting relating to the effect may be performed based on an operation performed by the player, and may be, for example, a selection of a music to be output or a type of background changed. The setting relating to the effect may include setting the function of the auto button to be enabled or disabled.

  Note that the “auto button” is a function of executing a process on the assumption that the push button 9031B has been operated, although the push button 9031B has not actually been operated by the player. In this example, the button announcement effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the announcement display is displayed based on the detection of the single operation or the continuous hit operation of the push button 9031B in the button announcement effect. When the function is set to be valid, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the process is executed assuming that the push button 9031B is operated once or repeatedly in the button announcement effect, and the announcement display is displayed. . In this example, the single operation means that the push button 9031B is operated once, and the continuous hitting operation means that the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times.

  Further, in this embodiment, “auto-hit” means that the push button 9031B is actually continuously depressed (long-pressed) by the player. This is a function of detecting that the button is pressed continuously (a state in which the button is repeatedly pressed (a state in which the push button 9031B is pressed and a state in which the push button 9031B is not pressed are repeated a plurality of times)). In this example, when the function of the auto button is invalid, a notice display may be displayed based on detection of a continuous tapping operation of the push button 9031B in the button notice effect, but the push button 9031B is long-pressed. Also in this case, a notice display is displayed on the assumption that the continuous hit operation has been detected.

  In this example, the effect setting process of step S9078 in FIG. 58 is executed, so that any timing (for example, a period during which a customer waiting demonstration is displayed, a period during which a decorative symbol is variably displayed, and a big hit game is played) During this period, it is possible to set whether the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled based on the operation of the push button 9031B by the player. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 75, an example in which the volume setting is changed by the player at the timing of “X” shown in FIG. 69 is shown, but instead of the volume setting, the function of the auto button is enabled as the effect setting. Or invalidation can be set. That is, it is possible to set whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. Note that it is also possible to display whether the auto button is valid or invalid within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed. Note that, in this example, the function of the automatic continuous tapping is always valid, but it may be configured to enable or disable the function like the function of the auto button.

  FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display mode when the function of the auto button is set to valid or invalid. In FIG. 81, the display screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3). In the case of FIG. 81 (1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid. As shown in FIG. 81 (1), when the player performs a long press operation on the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed, as shown in FIG. 81 (2), the auto button Is set to be enabled, and a character string such as “Auto button enabled” is displayed on the image display device 905 to display that the function of the auto button is enabled. In addition, at this time, the control for emitting the push button 9031B in the special light emission mode may be performed together with the control for outputting the auto button effective sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  When the player performs a pressing operation (single-shot operation) on the push button 9031B while the function of the auto button is set to be valid, the function of the auto button is invalidated as shown in FIG. 81 (3). Is displayed, and a character string such as “Auto button disabled” is displayed on the image display device 905 to display that the function of the auto button has been disabled. In addition, at this time, the control for outputting the auto button invalid sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R and the control for causing the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode may be performed.

  In the example of FIG. 81, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. However, by performing the same operation as described above, the setting is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can also be changed during a customer waiting demonstration period, a jackpot game period, or the like. In addition, for example, when the function of the auto button is changed from the menu screen, similarly to the example shown in FIG. Control to output the auto button invalid sound effect or the auto button valid sound effect from the speakers 908L and 908R, and to control the push button 9031B to emit light in the normal light emission mode or the special light emission mode. You may.

  Next, a description will be given of a difference between a case where the automatic continuous hit is performed by the long press operation and a case where the automatic continuous hit is performed by the auto button function. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram showing a comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation and the automatic continuous hit by the auto button function. In the example shown in FIG. 82, it is assumed that execution of the button announcement effect A has been determined as the button announcement effect.

  In the “button announcement effect A” and the “button announcement effect B”, when the operation valid period starts, a gauge display corresponding to the number of times the push button 9031B is operated is displayed, and the operation of the push button 9031B is detected. Each time, the display is updated so that the scale of the gauge display is decreased by one. Then, when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number (that is, when the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied, and the advance notice is displayed (for example, “hot heat!” Or “chance!”). Is displayed.

  When the function of the auto button is invalid and the execution of the button announcement effect A is determined, if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button announcement effect, the long press operation is started. After 4 seconds have passed, detection by automatic continuous tapping is started, and during detection by automatic continuous tapping, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased by one every 1.0 second. In addition, when the execution of the button announcement effect B is determined, if a long press operation of the push button 9031B is started during the execution of the button announcement effect, the automatic operation is performed two seconds after the start of the long press operation. Detection by repeated tapping is started, and during detection by automatic repeated tapping, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is treated as increasing by one every 0.5 seconds. Regardless of whether the button announcement effect A or the button announcement effect B is executed, if a normal continuous tapping operation of the push button 9031B is performed, every time a pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected. The number of operations is treated as being increased by one.

  In addition, if the function of the auto button is valid, when the button announcement effect A is executed, 1.0 second elapses from the start of the operation validity period even if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is not performed. Each time the push button 9031B is operated, the number of operations is increased by one. Also, when the button announcement effect B is executed, the number of operations by the push button 9031B is increased every 0.5 seconds after the start of the operation validity period, even if the long press operation of the push button 9031B is not performed. Treated as incremented by one. Although details will be described later, when the button announcement effect C is executed, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, a predetermined timing in the middle of the operation valid period (for example, the operation valid period is 6 seconds) , When the time reaches 3 seconds from the start of the operation validity period), it is treated as if the number of operations by the push button 9031B has been performed once.

  Note that, for example, the auto continuous hit start time and the automatic continuous hit detection period may be selected from a plurality of options at different rates depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit", the auto continuous beating start time is determined to be 0 second at a rate of 50%, and is determined to be 2 seconds at a rate of 50%. May be determined to be 0 seconds at a rate of 70% and 2 seconds at a rate of 30%. When the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic continuous hit detection interval is determined to be 0.5 seconds at a rate of 70%, and is determined to be 1 second at a rate of 30%. In this case, the time may be determined to be 0.5 second at a rate of 50%, and may be determined to be 1 second at a rate of 50%. In addition, for the configuration in which the auto continuous hit start time and the automatic continuous hit detection period are selected from a plurality of options at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit”, the automatic continuous hit by the auto button function and the long press operation May be applied to only one of the automatic hits, or may be applied to both.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 82 (A), when the automatic continuous hit is performed by the long press operation, a predetermined start standby period is started after the long press operation of the push button 31 is started after the start of the operation valid period. After a lapse of 4 seconds (in this example), the continuous hit determination is turned on (that is, the process is executed as if the continuous hit operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), when the automatic continuous tapping is performed by the auto button function, the continuous tapping determination is immediately turned on immediately after the start of the operation valid period (that is, the operation valid period is not determined). Immediately after the start, the process is executed as if the continuous hitting operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases.) With such a configuration, an effect (for example, a decrease in the scale of the gauge display) is provided when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. ) Can be performed at different times, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in this example, when the execution of the button announcement effect B is determined, when the automatic continuous hit by the long press operation is performed, the long press operation of the push button 9031B is performed after the start of the operation validity period. After a predetermined start waiting period (2 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the start, the continuous hit determination is turned on, and when the automatic continuous hit is performed by the auto button function, the continuous hit is performed immediately after the start of the operation validity period. The judgment turns on. Therefore, in both cases of the button announcement effects A and B, the effect is produced when the auto button function is valid and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is invalid and the long press operation is performed. The timing at which (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display) is executed is configured to be different.

  In the above embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, it has been described that the predetermined suggestion effect as a mini game always indicates success, but the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect may indicate failure. The rate at which the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect indicates success may differ depending on the execution timing of the effect. Specifically, since the execution timing of the predetermined suggestion effect differs depending on the execution timing of the special display effect, it suffices that the rate at which the effect result of the predetermined suggestion effect indicates success depends on the execution timing of the special display effect. In addition, for example, even when the special display effect is executed at the execution timing of “timing 1” shown in FIG. 65, the execution timing of the predetermined suggestion effect may be a plurality of timings. The rate at which the effect result indicates success may be varied according to the execution timing. According to this, the player's attention to the start timing of the predetermined suggestion effect can be attracted.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the ratio of the variable display result to “big hit” varies depending on the combination of the icons displayed as the special display. However, this is an example. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing an active display change effect for changing the display mode of the active display corresponding to the variable display and a look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the active display or the hold display may be changed. The rate at which the variable display result is "big hit" may be different depending on the combination with the display mode of display (the number or combination of icons). According to this, the production effect can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an icon as a special display is displayed by determining a timing at which the execution period of the preview effect and the execution period of the special display effect do not overlap as the execution timing of the preview effect (when the special display is performed). Change), the execution of the notice effect is restricted in a predetermined period after the notification is made. For example, although the notice effect is restricted, the expectation of the big hit of one-shot notice is extremely high (here, , "Big hit" determination) special effects can be executed, and the special effects are not limited even during a predetermined period after it is notified that an icon as a special display is displayed (the special display changes). Is also good. In this case, as for the execution timing of the special effect, for example, referring to a table as shown in FIG. The timing may be determined from a plurality of timings. Note that the special effect may be an effect in which the hold display is changed by an operation of the player, in addition to the one-off notification. According to this, the effect which is limited and the effect which is not limited are sharpened, and the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the example in which the restriction of the execution of the notice effect includes not only the case of not executing (prohibiting) but also the case of executing the notice effect in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize is described. In, when the execution of the notice effect is performed without prohibition, if the icon display as the special display is given priority over the notice effect (the icon display layer is set to the player side over the notice effect layer, etc.) Good. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in visually recognizing the special display, and it is possible to improve the performance effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the abnormality notification is possible even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed, but this is an example. In addition to the abnormality notification, information on the game, such as a hitting notification, a ball announcement, a fourth symbol, and the like may be appropriately notified as special notification. In addition, the ball announcement is to display the number of balls (acquired number of balls) acquired by the player in a recognizable manner, and the special announcement may be updated each time the number of acquired balls increases. Normally, the number of obtained payouts is displayed during a high base and is updated after a big hit, so it is updated within a predetermined period after the notification that an icon as a special display is displayed is given. However, the payout due to the game ball winning the winning opening during the high base may be updated with the number of acquired payouts, which is applicable in such a case. Further, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine in which the variable display result is frequently set to “small hits” during the high base to increase the number of obtained balls by the player. According to this, it is possible to update the acquired payout number even within a predetermined period after the notification that the icon as the special display is displayed, and it is possible to appropriately inform the player of the acquired payout number. . It should be noted that the hitting information may be any information such as a right-handed notification or a left-handed information that recognizablely displays the area in which the game ball is fired to the player. In addition, the fourth symbol may be anything that displays a variable display by blinking a lamp so as to be recognizable to the player.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time, a type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of a pseudo-run, one variation pattern command is issued when the variation is started. Although the transmission example has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 9012 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90100 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command is used to determine the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode after 2 stops) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control in the variable display may be performed on the side of the effect control board 9012 based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The microcomputer 90100 for game control notifies the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and a specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 9012. Is also good. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this manner, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols including numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, or lighting patterns of each segment not limited to the numbers and symbols are used. An example of variable display has been described. However, the variable display results and the special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are numbers indicating "0" to "9" or symbols indicating "-". However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the lighting pattern during the variable display of the special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol) Are also included in the special symbol variable display (in this case, the one pattern (for example, the lost symbol) appears to blink). Further, the special symbol displayed during the variable display may be different from the special symbol displayed as the variable display result. As a variable display of a special symbol, for example, a display in which "-" blinks is performed, and as a variable display result, other special symbols ("7" for "big hit", "1" for "losing", etc.) ) Is also included in the special symbol variable display. In addition, blinking display or scroll display of one type of decorative symbol is also included in the variable display of the decorative symbol. The lighting pattern during the variable display of the normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off, and includes a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off and one pattern in which at least some of the LEDs are turned on (for example, a lost symbol). Alternate repetition is normally included in the variable display of symbols. Further, the decorative symbol or the ordinary symbol displayed during the variable display may be different from the decorative symbol or the ordinary symbol displayed as the variable display result.

  In the above embodiment, the ratio (including the determination ratio and the like; the same applies to the probability) and the like may include 0%. That is, the ratio and the probability may be between 0 and 100%. For example, making one ratio different from the other ratio means that one ratio is set to, for example, 30%, the other ratio is set to 70%, and one ratio is set to, for example, 0%, and the other ratio is set to 100%. Including. Also, the sum of one ratio and the other ratio does not have to be 100% (there may be a certain ratio that is not included in either one or the other). Further, when the ratio of the other is set to be higher than the ratio of one, the ratio of one of the ratios is set to 0% and the ratio of the other is set to 100%. For example, in the above, differentiating the variable display pattern determination ratio in a specific period after the advantageous state from the variable display pattern determination ratio in other than the specific period means that the variable display pattern selected on one side is selected on the other side. This also includes cases in which the variable display pattern selected on the one hand and the variable display pattern selected on the other hand partially or completely do not overlap. These may be defined by the contents of a table that defines the ratio.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to the one that performs the probable change control in which the big hit type becomes “probable” when the big hit symbol indicating a predetermined number is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol. May be a pachinko game machine of the probability change determination device type in which the probability change control is performed based on the game ball passing through a specific area in the attacker provided in the game machine.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the rendering operation of rendering images in the display area of the image display device 905 deviate from the gist of the present invention. Any changes and modifications can be made without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout-type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but includes a gaming ball and responds to the detection of a winning ball. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that gives a score or a gaming machine that controls a big hit gaming state when passing through a specific passage gate. Furthermore, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a game value (medal or the like), and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be variably displayed. One game is completed by deriving the display result on the variable display device, and the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the display result derived on the variable display device.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 901 by a detachable recording medium. The distribution may be performed by pre-installing the storage device in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 560 Game control microcomputer 100 Effect control microcomputer 9 Effect display device 901 Pachinko game machine 902 Amusement board 903 Game machine frames 904A, 904B Special symbol display device 905 Image display device 906A Ordinary prize ball device 906B Normal Variable winning ball device 907 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 908R Speaker 909 Game effect lamp 9011 Main board 9012 Effect control board 9013 Voice control board 9014 Lamp control board 9015 Relay board 9020 Normal symbol display 9021 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start-up switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Game control microcomputers 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 Random number circuit 105, 125 I / O
90120 Effect control CPU
90123 Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Specific effect execution means capable of executing the specific effect suggesting the transition to the advantageous state over a plurality of changes,
Predetermined effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of predetermined effects different from each other,
Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect of whether or not controlled to the advantageous state,
Special display means for performing a special display in which the display mode can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage,
Special notification execution means capable of executing special notification for notifying information on the game,
Special production execution means capable of executing a special production that performs either a successful production or a failed production after performing a common introduction production ,
The special display means changes the display mode of the special display when a predetermined period has elapsed after being notified that the display mode of the special display is changed,
The special notification executing means is capable of executing the special notification even during a predetermined period after the display mode of the special display is notified of being changed,
The predetermined effect execution means,
Start the execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect in response to the execution of the specific effect, and correspond to the specific effect in response to the end of the notification effect executed after the specific effect. A first pattern for ending the execution of the type of predetermined effect;
The execution of the predetermined effect of the type corresponding to the specific effect is started in response to the execution of the specific effect, and the transition to the advantageous state is performed during the execution of the notification effect performed after the specific effect. a second pattern special effect suggesting changes the type of the predetermined effect in response to being executed, Ri executable der and
The special effect execution means does not execute the special effect in which the failed effect is performed in a period from when the display mode of the special display is notified to the change of the display mode of the special display. A gaming machine, wherein the special effect in which the successful effect is performed is executable .